Dolby Lake Controller Manual

Dolby Lake
Controller Manual
Issue 5
For users of software v.5.1
Part Number 911002
Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

Corporate Headquarters
DolbyLaboratories,Inc.
100PotreroAvenue
SanFrancisco,CA 941034813 USA
Telephone4155580200
Fax4158631373
www.dolby.com
European Headquarters
DolbyLaboratories,Inc.
WoottonBassett
Wiltshire SN48QJ England
Telephone441793842100
Fax441793842101
DISCLAIMEROFWARRANTIES:
EQUIPMENTMANUFACTUREDBYDOLBYLABORATORIESISWARRANTEDAGAINSTDEFECTS
INMATERIALSANDWORKMANSHIPFORAPERIODOFONEYEARFROMTHEDATEOF
PURCHASE.THEREARENOOTHEREXPRESSORIMPLIEDWARRANTIESANDNOWARRANTY
OFMERCHANTABILITYORFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSE,OROFNONINFRINGEMENT
OFTHIRDPARTYRIGHTS(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,COPYRIGHTANDPATENT
RIGHTS).
LIMITATIONOFLIABILITY:
ITISUNDERSTOODANDAGREEDTHATDOLBYLABORATORIESLIABILITY,WHETHERIN
CONTRACT,INTORT,UNDERANYWARRANTY,INNEGLIGENCE,OROTHERWISE,SHALLNOT
EXCEEDTHECOSTOFREPAIRORREPLACEMENTOFTHEDEFECTIVECOMPONENTSOR
ACCUSEDINFRINGINGDEVICES,ANDUNDERNOCIRCUMSTANCESSHALLDOLBY
LABORATORIESBELIABLEFORINCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,DIRECT,INDIRECT,OR
CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,DAMAGETOSOFTWAREOR
RECORDEDAUDIOORVISUALMATERIAL),COSTOFDEFENSE,ORLOSSOFUSE,REVENUE,OR
PROFIT,EVENIFDOLBYLABORATORIESORITSAGENTSHAVEBEENADVISED,ORALLYORIN
WRITING,OFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGES.
Dolby,Lake,andthedoubleDsymbolareregisteredtrademarksofDolbyLaboratories.
Contour,IdealGraphicEQ,IsoFloat,LimiterMax,MesaEQ,MesaParametricEQ,and
MesaQuadEQaretrademarksofDolbyLaboratories.
Allothertrademarksremainthepropertyoftheirrespectiveowners.
2008DolbyLaboratories.Allrightsreserved.
ii
PartNumber911002
Issue5
S08/19138/20389
Dolby Lake Controller Manual

ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT(AGREEMENT)FORDOLBYLABORATORIES,INC.
(DOLBY)SOFTWARERELATEDTOTHEDOLBYLAKEPROCESSOR
IMPORTANTREAD CAREFULLY: This Agreement is a legal agreement between you, (either as an

individualoranentity)andDolbyforthesoftwareprovidedbyDolbyinconnectionwithyourpurchase
or evaluation of the Dolby Lake Processor, including without limitation, the Dolby Lake Controller
software that accompanies this Agreement, which includes computer software and may include
associatedmedia,printedmaterials,onlineandelectronicdocumentation(Software).YOUHEREBY
AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT BY CLICKING THE ACCEPT
BUTTON AT THE END OF THIS AGREEMENT, INSTALLING, COPYING, OR OTHERWISE
USING THE SOFTWARE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT,DO
NOTCLICKTHEACCEPTBUTTONATTHEENDOFTHISAGREEMENT,INSTALL,COPY,OR
USETHESOFTWARE.
SOFTWARELICENSE
1.
LICENSEGRANT.Dolbygrantsyouonlythoserightsexpresslygrantedtoyouinthis
AgreementprovidedthatyoucomplywithalltermsandconditionsofthisAgreement.
1.1
Software License Grant. Dolby grants to you a nonexclusive, revocable, limited, non
transferablelicensetoinstall,use,access,displayandrunone(1)copyoftheSoftware.Inadditiontothe
otherrestrictionscontainedinthisAgreement,youagreethatinnoeventshalltheSoftwarerunonmore
thanonecomputeratanyonetime.
1.2
Documentation. You may make and use an unlimited number of copies of any
documentation, if any, provided that such copies shall be used solely for your own use in association
with the Software and are not to be republished or distributed (either in hard copy, electronic or any
otherform)beyondyourpremisesortoanythirdparty.
2.
RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Dolby reserves all rights not
expresslygrantedtoyouinthisAgreement.TheSoftwareisprotectedbycopyright,patentand/orother
intellectual property laws and treaties. Dolby or its suppliers own the title, copyright, and other
intellectualpropertyrightsintheSoftware.TheSoftwareislicensed,notsold.
3.
LIMITATIONSONLICENSE.YouareexpresslyprohibitedfromusingtheSoftwarein
anymannernotspecificallyandexpresslyauthorizedbyDolbyinthisAgreement.Withoutlimitingthe
foregoing,andfortheavoidanceofdoubt,therestrictionsinthisSectionalsoapply.Youmaynotmake
anycopiesoftheSoftwareexceptandtotheextentnecessaryforbackupandarchivalpurposes.Youmay
not modify, create derivative works, reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software, except
and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation. You may not delete, fail to reproduce or modify any patent, copyright, trademark or other
proprietary rights notices which appear on or in the Software or documentation. No license, right, or
interest in any Dolby trademark, trade name or service mark is granted to you pursuant to this
Agreement.
4.
NO RENTAL/COMMERCIAL HOSTING. You may not rent, lease, lend or provide
commercialhostingserviceswiththeSoftware.
5.
PRODUCTSUPPORTSERVICES/CONSENTTOUSEOFDATA.Uponyour
acceptanceofthisAgreement,asindicatedbyclickingtheAcceptbuttonattheendofthisAgreement,
DolbyshallmakeavailabletoyouproductsupportservicesrelatedtotheSoftware(PSS)forone(1)
yearfromthedateofpurchase.
iii
PSS may include, as solely determined by Dolby, features such as telephone, e-mail and/or on-line
support and software bug fixes. Any software Dolby may provide you as part of support services are
governed by this Agreement, unless separate terms are provided. Except as specifically and expressly
provided, this Agreement does not obligate Dolby to provide any support services or to support any
software provided as part of those services. You agree that Dolby and its affiliates may collect and use
technical information gathered as part of the product support services provided to you, if any, related to
the Software. Dolby may use this information solely to improve our products or to provide customized
services, support or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally
identifies you.
6.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is subject to U.S. export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the
Software, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.
7.
INDEMNIFICATION AND REPRESENTATION. You represent and warrant that you
will not make or sell a product using the Software if the purpose and/or result of such product is that it
violates copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Dolby or any third party. You shall indemnify,
defend and hold harmless Dolby, its affiliates, their respective successors and their respective officers,
directors, employees, agents, and representatives for any claim, liability, loss or damage arising out of: 1)
your breach of any term of this Agreement; 2) the making, using or selling by you of any product using
the Software, except with respect to such claim, liability, loss or damage that directly and to the extent it
arises out of the Software as originally delivered to you; and 3) any claim of allegedly unauthorized use
or violation of any third party intellectual property.
8.
TERMINATION. Without prejudice to any other rights, Dolby may immediately
terminate this Agreement if you fail to comply with any of the terms or conditions of this Agreement. In
such event, you must immediately cease using the Software and destroy and purge all copies of the
Software and all of its component parts.
9.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, DOLBY AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE AND SUPPORT
SERVICES (IF ANY) AS IS AND WITH ALL FAULTS, AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY (IF ANY) IMPLIED WARRANTIES, DUTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF
RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, OF COMPATIBILITY, OF ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF
RESPONSES, OF RESULTS, OF WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, OF AND OF
LACK OF NEGLIGENCE, ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, AND THE PROVISION OF
OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR OTHER SERVICES, INFORMATION, SOFTWARE, AND
RELATED CONTENT THROUGH THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OF THE SOFTWARE. ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF TITLE, QUIET
ENJOYMENT, QUIET POSSESSION, CORRESPONDENCE TO DESCRIPTION OR NONINFRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE. THERE IS NO WARRANTY THAT THE
OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, ERROR-FREE OR WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, OR ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE AND ANY SUPPORT SERVICES REMAINS WITH
YOU.
10.
EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND CERTAIN OTHER
DAMAGES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT
SHALL DOLBY OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE,
INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS OR CONFIDENTIAL OR OTHER INFORMATION, FOR
iv
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, FOR PERSONAL INJURY, FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY, FOR FAILURE
TO MEET ANY DUTY INCLUDING OF GOOD FAITH OR OF REASONABLE CARE, FOR
NEGLIGENCE,ANDFORANYOTHERPECUNIARYOROTHERLOSSWHATSOEVER)ARISING
OUTOFORINANYWAYRELATEDTOTHEUSEOFORINABILITYTOUSETHESOFTWARE,
THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR OTHER SERVICES,
INFORMATON, SOFTWARE, AND RELATED CONTENT THROUGH THE SOFTWARE OR
OTHERWISEARISINGOUTOFTHEUSEOFTHESOFTWARE,OROTHERWISEUNDERORIN
CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT OF THE
FAULT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), MISREPRESENTATION, STRICT LIABILITY,
BREACH OF CONTRACT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY OF DOLBY OR ANY SUPPLIER, AND
EVEN IF DOLBY OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
11.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY
DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR
GENERALDAMAGESINCONTRACTORANYTHINGELSE),THEENTIRELIABILITYOFDOLBY
AND ANY OF ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT AND YOUR
EXCLUSIVEREMEDYHEREUNDERSHALLBELIMITEDTOTHEAMOUNTACTUALLYPAIDBY
YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES FROM WHICH THE CLAIM ARISES, BUT IN NO
EVENT MORE THAN USD$500. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS AND
DISCLAIMERS(INCLUDINGSECTIONS10AND11)SHALLAPPLYTOTHEMAXIMUMEXTENT
PERMITTEDBYAPPLICABLELAW,EVENIFANYREMEDYFAILSITSESSENTIALPURPOSE.
12.
U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS. All Software provided to the U.S.
Government pursuant to solicitations issued on or after December 1, 1995 is provided with the
commerciallicenserightsandrestrictionsdescribedelsewhereherein.AllSoftwareprovidedtotheU.S.
Government pursuant to solicitations issued prior to December 1, 1995 is provided with Restricted
RightsasprovidedforinFAR,48CFR52.22714(JUNE1987)orDFAR,48CFR252.2277013(OCT1988),
asapplicable.
13.
APPLICABLELAW.ThisAgreementwillbeconstruedaccordingtothesubstantivelaw,
butnotthechoiceoflawrules,oftheStateofCaliforniaandofapplicablefederallawoftheUnitedStates.
IfanydisputearisesunderthisAgreement,Dolbyandyouagreethatthevenueforsuchdisputewillbe
in the California Superior Courts and the Federal District Court for the Northern District of California
locatedinSanFrancisco,California,andyouherebysubmittothejurisdictionofsuchcourts.
14.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY; MISCELLANEOUS. This Agreement

(includinganyaddendumoramendmenttothisAgreementwhichisincludedwiththeSoftware)arethe
entireagreementbetweenyouandDolbyrelatingtotheSoftwareandthesupportservices(ifany)and
they supersede all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals and
representationswithrespecttotheSoftwareoranyothersubjectmattercoveredbythisAgreement.To
theextentthetermsofanyDolbypoliciesorprogramsforsupportservicesconflictwiththetermsofthis
Agreement, the terms of this Agreement shall control. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be
void,invalid,unenforceableorillegal,theotherprovisionsshallcontinueinfullforceandeffect.There
maybetechnologicalmeasuresinorpartoftheSoftwareorthatmaybeenabledbyuseoftheSoftware
thataredesignedtopreventtheunlicensed,unauthorizedorillegaluseoftheSoftwareand/ortoidentify
usersoftheSoftware.YouunderstandandagreethatDolbymayusesuchmeasures.
Contents
Introduction................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1
Controller Overview...................................................................................................................... 1
1.2
Manual Overview ......................................................................................................................... 1
Dolby Lake Controller Installation ............................................................................................ 3

2.1
Computer Requirements and Configuration ................................................................................ 3

2.1.1
Recommended PC Specifications .................................................................................. 3
2.1.2
Video Card Settings ........................................................................................................ 3
2.1.3
Tablet PC and Laptop Power Settings............................................................................ 5
2.1.4
Tablet PC Input Panel Settings....................................................................................... 6
2.2
Software Installation..................................................................................................................... 8
2.3
PC Networking Setup................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.1
How Networking Works................................................................................................... 8
2.3.2
IP Address Configuration ................................................................................................ 9
2.3.3
Wired Network Setup .................................................................................................... 12
2.3.4
Verifying Controller and Processor Communication ..................................................... 12
2.3.5
Wireless Network Setup................................................................................................ 13
2.3.6
Configuring the Tablet PC for Wireless Networking ..................................................... 15
2.3.7
Confirming Wireless Operation of the Dolby Lake Controller ....................................... 17
2.3.8
Using Dante in Conjunction with Wireless Data Control or Low-Bandwidth Devices... 18
2.3.9
Dante with Quality o Service Ethernet Switches........................................................... 19
2.3.10 Recommended Network Topologies When Using Dante ............................................. 20
Dolby Lake Controller Tutorial ................................................................................................ 23

3.1
Starting the Dolby Lake Controller ............................................................................................. 23
3.2
Overview of Main Page Components ........................................................................................ 24
3.3
3.4
3.2.1
Button Bar Interface ...................................................................................................... 24
3.2.2
Help and Status Messages ........................................................................................... 25
3.2.3
Page Tabs..................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.4
Minimizing the Lake Controller...................................................................................... 26
Modules and Frames ................................................................................................................. 26

3.3.1
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 26
3.3.2
Changing to Contour & Mesa Mode.............................................................................. 28
3.3.3
Module Icons................................................................................................................. 30
3.3.4
Selecting and Moving Icons .......................................................................................... 31
3.3.5
Labeling Frames and Modules...................................................................................... 33
3.3.6
I/O Config ...................................................................................................................... 35
3.3.7
Dante............................................................................................................................. 41
3.3.8
Levels and Meters......................................................................................................... 44
Equalization................................................................................................................................ 47
3.4.1
Graphic EQ ................................................................................................................... 47
vi
Contents
3.4.2
Ideal Graphic EQ........................................................................................................... 49
3.4.3
Parametric EQ............................................................................................................... 52
3.4.4
Add a New EQ Overlay................................................................................................. 53
3.4.5
Mesa Filter .................................................................................................................... 54
3.5
Crossovers ................................................................................................................................. 56
3.6
Groups ....................................................................................................................................... 58
3.7
Dolby Lake Controller File Types............................................................................................... 60
3.8
Conclusion ................................................................................................................................. 61
HomeMenu Reference .......................................................................................................... 63

4.1
Accessing EQ/Levels from Home .............................................................................................. 65
EQ/LevelsMenu Reference................................................................................................... 67
5.1
5.2
EQ/Levels Overview................................................................................................................... 68
5.1.1
General Access............................................................................................................. 68
5.1.2
Restricted Access ......................................................................................................... 68
5.1.3
Group Adjustments ....................................................................................................... 68
5.1.4
Default Settings............................................................................................................. 68
Levels......................................................................................................................................... 69
5.2.1
Gain............................................................................................................................... 71
5.2.2
Delay ............................................................................................................................. 71
5.2.3
LimiterMax..................................................................................................................... 71
5.2.4
Input Headroom ............................................................................................................ 73
5.2.5
Enable Mute .................................................................................................................. 73
5.2.6
Enable Polarity .............................................................................................................. 73
5.2.7
Label Channel ............................................................................................................... 73
5.2.8
Meter Options................................................................................................................ 74
5.2.9
Default Overlays............................................................................................................ 76
5.2.10 Hidden Overlays............................................................................................................ 77

5.2.11 Parametric EQ Screen .................................................................................................. 77
5.2.12 Graphic EQ Screen....................................................................................................... 79
5.2.13 Input EQ Menu Reference ............................................................................................ 81
5.2.14 Overlay Bypass/Overlay Insert/Overlay Compare ........................................................ 84
5.2.15 Overlay Flat................................................................................................................... 85
5.2.16 Filter Bypass/Filter Insert .............................................................................................. 85
5.2.17 Filter Flat ....................................................................................................................... 85
5.2.18 Filter Delete................................................................................................................... 85
5.2.19 Filter Edit ....................................................................................................................... 86
5.2.20 Analyzer Bridge/Analyzer Unavailable.......................................................................... 86
5.2.21 High-Precision Filter Adjustments................................................................................. 86
5.3
Crossovers and HPF/LPF .......................................................................................................... 87

5.3.1
Using the Highpass Filter (HPF Enable)....................................................................... 88
vii
Contents
5.3.2
Using PEQ Filters on the Xover Screen ....................................................................... 89
5.3.3
Linear Phase Crossovers.............................................................................................. 91
5.3.4
Crossover Functions ..................................................................................................... 91
5.3.5
Crossover Split/Crossover Combine/Alignment Delay ................................................. 93
5.3.6
Crossover/HPF/LPF Select........................................................................................... 95
5.3.7
HPF Set/LPF Set/Crossover Set/Filter Bypass/Filter Insert ......................................... 96
5.3.8
Filter Flat ....................................................................................................................... 97
5.3.9
Filter Delete................................................................................................................... 97
5.3.10 Filter Edit ....................................................................................................................... 97

5.3.11 Analyzer Bridge/Analyzer Unavailable.......................................................................... 98
5.4
Auxiliary Output Channels ......................................................................................................... 98

5.4.1
Using Auxiliary Outputs................................................................................................. 99
5.4.2
Adding Output-Specific EQ ........................................................................................... 99
5.4.3
Highpass and Lowpass Filters .................................................................................... 100
5.4.4
Auxiliary Output Menu Options ................................................................................... 102
System Store and RecallMenu Reference ........................................................................ 105

6.1
Shortcut to Data/User Folder ................................................................................................... 105
6.2
Recall as New SystemOpen................................................................................................. 105
6.3
Recall as Subsystem................................................................................................................ 106
6.4
Recall Compare ....................................................................................................................... 106
6.5
Recall as Virtual ....................................................................................................................... 107
6.6
Store System............................................................................................................................ 107
6.7
Store Subsystem...................................................................................................................... 107
6.8
File Utilities............................................................................................................................... 108
6.9
6.8.1
Open ........................................................................................................................... 108
6.8.2
Read Only ................................................................................................................... 108
6.8.3
Rename....................................................................................................................... 108
6.8.4
Delete.......................................................................................................................... 108
6.8.5
New Folder.................................................................................................................. 109
System Presets ........................................................................................................................ 109

6.9.1
Storing a System Preset in Multiple Processors......................................................... 109
6.9.2
Recalling a System Preset into Multiple Processors .................................................. 110
6.9.3
Quick System Preset Recall and Comparison............................................................ 111
6.9.4
Storing over an Existing Preset................................................................................... 111
6.9.5
Clearing a Preset Location.......................................................................................... 111
6.9.6
Preset Mismatch ......................................................................................................... 112
ModulesMenu Reference.................................................................................................... 113

7.1
EQ/Levels................................................................................................................................. 113
7.2
I/O Config ................................................................................................................................. 114

7.2.1
viii
Digital Clock Configuration.......................................................................................... 114
Contents
7.2.2
Input Configuration...................................................................................................... 118
7.2.3
Iso-Float Status/Virtual Frame I/O Card Configuration ............................................... 122
7.2.4
Input Mix Summary and Input Mixers/Switch.............................................................. 124
7.2.5
Output Configuration................................................................................................... 128
7.2.6
Latency Match............................................................................................................. 133
7.2.7
CobraNet..................................................................................................................... 133
7.2.8
Technical Data ............................................................................................................ 135
7.2.9
Input Mutes ................................................................................................................. 136
7.2.10 Interactive Signal Path Block Diagram ....................................................................... 137

7.2.11 Input Selection (Contour Pro26 and Mesa Quad EQ Only)........................................ 137
7.2.12 Frame Config/Factory Reset....................................................................................... 138
7.3
7.4
Label & Lock ............................................................................................................................ 139

7.3.1
Module Label............................................................................................................... 139
7.3.2
Frame Label ................................................................................................................ 139
7.3.3
Module and Base Configuration Locking .................................................................... 139
Copy/Paste/Replace ................................................................................................................ 140

7.4.1
Copy............................................................................................................................ 140
7.4.2
Paste ........................................................................................................................... 140
7.4.3
Replace Frame............................................................................................................ 140
7.4.4
Complete Replace....................................................................................................... 141
7.4.5
Batch Replace............................................................................................................. 141
7.5
Remove.................................................................................................................................... 142
7.6
Module Store/Recall................................................................................................................. 143

7.6.1
Recall/Open ................................................................................................................ 143
7.6.2
Store............................................................................................................................ 144
7.6.3
New Store ................................................................................................................... 144
7.6.4
Base Configuration ..................................................................................................... 144
7.6.5
File Utilities.................................................................................................................. 145
7.6.6
Frame Presets............................................................................................................. 146
7.7
Add Page ................................................................................................................................. 147
7.8
Super Modules ......................................................................................................................... 147

7.8.1
Assigning Super Modules ........................................................................................... 147
7.8.2
Super Module EQ/Levels or Module EQ/Levels ......................................................... 148
7.8.3
SM Routing: I/O Config ............................................................................................... 149
7.8.4
Label Frame ................................................................................................................ 150
7.8.5
Deassigning a Super Module...................................................................................... 152
7.8.6
Remove Super Module ............................................................................................... 152
Module File Types .................................................................................................................. 153

8.1
Module Type Abbreviations ..................................................................................................... 153
8.2
Classic Crossovers/Auxiliary Outputs ...................................................................................... 154

8.2.1
Stereo Classic 2-Way (+ Auxiliary Outputs)................................................................ 155
ix
Contents
8.3
8.4
8.2.2
Classic 3-Way/3 Auxiliary Outputs.............................................................................. 156
8.2.3
Classic 3-Way + 1 Auxiliary Output (with Classic 2-Way/2-Aux) ................................ 156
8.2.4
Classic 4-Way/4-Aux (with Classic 2-Way/2-Aux) ...................................................... 157
8.2.5
Classic 5-Way/5-Aux (with 1-Auxiliary Output) ........................................................... 159
8.2.6
Classic 6-Way/6-Auxiliary Outputs.............................................................................. 160
Linear Phase Crossovers......................................................................................................... 160

8.3.1
Linear Phase Brick Wall 2-Way (+1 Classic Auxiliary Output).................................... 161
8.3.2
Linear Phase Brick Wall 3-Way .................................................................................. 162
8.3.3
Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way .................................................................................. 163
Mesa EQ Module ..................................................................................................................... 164
Groups: Menu Reference....................................................................................................... 165

9.1
Adding a Group ........................................................................................................................ 165
9.2
EQ/Levels................................................................................................................................. 166
9.3
Assign ...................................................................................................................................... 166
9.4
Label ........................................................................................................................................ 167
9.5
Copy/Paste............................................................................................................................... 167
9.5.1
Copy............................................................................................................................ 167
9.5.2
Paste ........................................................................................................................... 168
9.6
Remove.................................................................................................................................... 168
9.7
Gang ........................................................................................................................................ 168
9.8
Add Page ................................................................................................................................. 169
Solo/MuteMenu Reference ................................................................................................. 171

10.1 EQ/Levels................................................................................................................................. 171
10.2 Solo/Mute Enable..................................................................................................................... 171
10.3 Pile
172
10.4 All Mute .................................................................................................................................... 172
Icon ControlMenu Reference ............................................................................................. 173

11.1 Meters On/Off........................................................................................................................... 173
11.2 Icon Small/Normal/Medium/Large............................................................................................ 174
User PreferencesMenu Reference..................................................................................... 175

12.1 Contexts ................................................................................................................................... 175
12.2 Delay Units............................................................................................................................... 176
12.3 Designer Functions .................................................................................................................. 176
12.3.1 Change Password....................................................................................................... 176
12.3.2 Designer Mode............................................................................................................ 176
12.3.3 Global Access ............................................................................................................. 177
12.4 Keyboard Shortcuts.................................................................................................................. 177
12.5 MIDI
177
12.6 About 177
Contents
12.7 Graphics................................................................................................................................... 177

12.7.1 Auto Icon Arrange ....................................................................................................... 177
12.7.2 Screen Capture ........................................................................................................... 178
12.7.3 Animate ....................................................................................................................... 178
12.7.4 Daylight Mode ............................................................................................................. 178
12.8 Show Mode .............................................................................................................................. 179
Pages: Menu Reference ......................................................................................................... 180

13.1 Cut Icon.................................................................................................................................... 181
13.2 Copy Icon ................................................................................................................................. 181
13.3 Paste Icon ................................................................................................................................ 181
13.4 Page Label ............................................................................................................................... 181
13.5 Page Delete ............................................................................................................................. 182
13.6 Page Add ................................................................................................................................. 182
13.7 Page Hide ................................................................................................................................ 182
13.8 Scrolling Pages ........................................................................................................................ 182
NetworkMenu Reference .................................................................................................... 183

14.1 Network .................................................................................................................................... 183
14.2 Multiple Controllers .................................................................................................................. 184
14.2.1 Overview and Menu Options....................................................................................... 184
14.2.2 Primary and Secondary Controllers ............................................................................ 185
14.2.3 Restricted Functionality............................................................................................... 185
14.2.4 Using the Analyzer Bridge with Multiple Dolby Lake Controllers................................ 186
14.3 Working Offline......................................................................................................................... 186
14.3.1 Virtual Frames............................................................................................................. 187
14.3.2 Virtual Frames I/O Card Configuration ....................................................................... 187
14.3.3 Replacing Virtual Frames with an Online Processor .................................................. 188
Communication and Synchronization .................................................................................. 189

15.1 Offline Modules ........................................................................................................................ 189
15.2 Communication/Network Errors ............................................................................................... 190
15.3 Synchronization........................................................................................................................ 190
15.3.1 Resync Process .......................................................................................................... 190
15.3.2 Out of Sync ................................................................................................................. 191
15.3.3 Updating All Processors with Computer Settings ....................................................... 192
15.3.4 Updating the Controller with Processor Settings ........................................................ 193
15.3.5 Synchronizing the Dolby Lake Controller and Processors ......................................... 193
15.3.6 Audible Changes when Synchronizing ....................................................................... 194
Keyboard Shortcuts Reference............................................................................................. 195

16.1 Enabling/Disabling Keyboard Shortcuts................................................................................... 195
16.2 General Keyboard Shortcuts.................................................................................................... 195
xi
Contents
16.3 Button-Bar Shortcuts................................................................................................................ 196

16.3.1 Context Switching ....................................................................................................... 196
16.3.2 Main Navigation/Function Buttons .............................................................................. 196
16.3.3 Undo/Redo .................................................................................................................. 196
16.4 Shortcut Combination Keys ..................................................................................................... 196
16.5 EQ, Levels, Xover, and Aux ScreensGeneral ...................................................................... 197
16.5.1 GEQ Overlay Shortcuts .............................................................................................. 197
16.5.2 PEQ Overlay Shortcuts............................................................................................... 198
16.5.3 Xover/Aux Screen Shortcuts....................................................................................... 199
16.5.4 Levels Screen Shortcuts ............................................................................................. 200
External Control Interfaces.................................................................................................... 201

17.1 AMX and Crestron Control....................................................................................................... 201
17.2 MIDI Control ............................................................................................................................. 201
17.2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 201
17.2.2 Available Functionality via MIDI .................................................................................. 201
17.2.3 Hex Conversion for SysEx Messages......................................................................... 202
17.2.4 Frame Preset Recall via MIDI (00).............................................................................. 203
17.2.5 Insert/Bypass Group EQ Overlay through MIDI (01) .................................................. 203
17.2.6 Insert/Bypass Module EQ Overlay through MIDI (02) ................................................ 204
17.2.7 Mute/Unmute Group Input through MIDI (03) ............................................................. 205
17.2.8 Mute/Unmute Module Input through MIDI (04) ........................................................... 205
17.2.9 Change Group Input Delay Through MIDI (05)........................................................... 207
Designer Mode Reference ..................................................................................................... 209

18.1 Designer Mode Basics ............................................................................................................. 209
18.1.1 Security Levels............................................................................................................ 209
18.1.2 Designer Mode............................................................................................................ 210
18.1.3 Designing and Protecting a Dolby Lake Controller System........................................ 211
18.2 Designer Mode Security........................................................................................................... 212
18.2.1 Security for the Base Configuration ............................................................................ 212
18.2.2 Security for Module Functions .................................................................................... 216
18.2.3 Security for Group Functions ...................................................................................... 218
18.2.4 Security for Global Access Functions ......................................................................... 220
18.3 Functional Reference Guide .................................................................................................... 221
18.3.1 Xover/Aux/HPF/LPF Functions ................................................................................... 221
18.3.2 EQ Functions .............................................................................................................. 222
18.3.3 Levels Functions ......................................................................................................... 222
18.3.4 Additional Designer Mode Functions .......................................................................... 225
18.4 Designer Worksheets............................................................................................................... 227
18.4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 227
18.4.2 Worksheet Navigation and Data Entry........................................................................ 229
xii
Contents
18.4.3 Xover/Aux: Design (Loudspeaker Modules Only)....................................................... 229

18.4.4 HPF/LPF - Design (Mesa EQ Only) ............................................................................ 231
18.4.5 Levels - Design ........................................................................................................... 231
18.4.6 PEQ - Design .............................................................................................................. 233
18.4.7 GEQ - Design.............................................................................................................. 233
18.4.8 Locked Modules/Hidden/View Only Data ................................................................... 233
Firmware Upgrade Process ................................................................................................... 235

19.1 Firmware Upgrade Using the Update Utility ............................................................................ 235
19.2 Firmware Upgrade Using the Dolby Lake Controller ............................................................... 237
IP Address Selection.............................................................................................................. 239

A.1
Network Essentials................................................................................................................... 239
A.2
Factory Reset Configuration .................................................................................................... 240
Command-Line Options......................................................................................................... 241

Index ........................................................................................................................................ 243
xiii
Contents
List of Figures
Figure 2-1 TCP/IP Protocol Suite.................................................................................................................. 9
Figure 2-2 Basic Wireless Setup (Not Suitable for Use with Dante)........................................................... 14
Figure 3-1 Contour Frame .......................................................................................................................... 27
Figure 3-2 Mesa Frame .............................................................................................................................. 27
Figure 3-3 Contour & Mesa Frame ............................................................................................................. 27
Figure 3-4 Module Components ................................................................................................................. 30
Figure 3-5 Conventional Graphic Equalization and Resulting Frequency Response................................. 49
Figure 3-6 Ideal Graphic EQ and Resulting Frequency Response ............................................................ 50
Figure 3-7 Comparison of Raised Cosine and Traditional Third-Octave Filters......................................... 51
Figure 5-1 EQ/Levels Overview .................................................................................................................. 67
Figure 5-2 Levels Interface for a Classic 3-Way Module ............................................................................ 69
Figure 5-3 Sample Composite EQ Curve ................................................................................................... 76
Figure 5-4 Mesa Parametric EQ Screen..................................................................................................... 77
Figure 5-5 Ideal Graphic EQ Screen .......................................................................................................... 80
Figure 5-6 Xover Screen............................................................................................................................. 87
Figure 12-1 Controller in Daylight Mode ................................................................................................... 178
Figure 15-1 Out of Sync Notifications ....................................................................................................... 192
Figure 15-2 Controller Settings on a PEQ1 Screen.................................................................................. 193
Table 18-1 Global Access Security Functions .......................................................................................... 220
xiv
Contents
List of Tables
Table 3-1 Dolby Lake Processor Signal Processing Configurations .......................................................... 27
Table 3-2 Number of Modules in Different Processor Configurations ........................................................ 27
Table 3-3 Dolby Lake Controller File Types ............................................................................................... 60
Table 4-1 Home Button Bar ........................................................................................................................ 64
Table 5-1 Function Descriptions for the Levels Interface ........................................................................... 70
Table 5-2 Function Descriptions for Mesa Parametric EQ Screen............................................................. 78
Table 5-3 Function Descriptions for Graphic EQ Screen ........................................................................... 81
Table 5-4 EQ Preference Descriptions ....................................................................................................... 82
Table 5-5 Function Descriptions for Xover EQ Screen............................................................................... 88
Table 5-6 Linear Phase Brick Wall 2-Way/3-Way....................................................................................... 94
Table 5-7 Linear Phase 24 dB/Octave 2-Way/3-Way................................................................................. 94
Table 5-8 Linear Phase 48 dB/Octave 2-Way/3-Way................................................................................. 95
Table 5-9 Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way .................................................................................................. 95
Table 5-10 Filter Edit Values....................................................................................................................... 97
Table 5-11 Auxiliary Output Module Uses .................................................................................................. 98
Table 5-12 Auxiliary Output Menu ............................................................................................................ 102
Table 5-13 Auxiliary Output Buttons ......................................................................................................... 103
Table 7-1 Input Mix Summaries ................................................................................................................ 124
Table 7-2 CobraNet Conductor Priority Values ........................................................................................ 134
Table 7-3 Input Selections ........................................................................................................................ 138
Table 8-1 Module Type Abbreviations ...................................................................................................... 153
Table 14-1 Multiple Controllers Options ................................................................................................... 184
Table 15-1 Out of Sync Notifications ........................................................................................................ 192
Table 15-2 Controller Settings .................................................................................................................. 194
Table 16-1 Keyboard and Mouse-Wheel Shortcuts.................................................................................. 195
Table 16-2 Standard Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................................ 196
Table 16-3 Tab Shortcuts ......................................................................................................................... 197
Table 16-4 GEQ Overlay Shortcuts .......................................................................................................... 197
Table 16-5 PEQ Overlay Shortcuts........................................................................................................... 198
Table 16-6 Xover/Aux Shortcuts ............................................................................................................... 199
Table 16-7 Levels Shortcuts ..................................................................................................................... 200
Table 17-1 Decimal and Hexadecimal Equivalents .................................................................................. 202
Table 17-2 Alphabet Letter and Hexadecimal Equivalents....................................................................... 202
Table 17-3 SysEx Message Structure for Frame Preset Recall ............................................................... 203
Table 17-4 Message Fields for Frame Preset Recall ............................................................................... 203
Table 17-5 SysEx Message Structure for Insert/Bypass Group EQ Overlay (MIDI 01) ........................... 204
Table 17-6 Message Fields for Insert/Bypass Group EQ Overlay (MIDI 01) ........................................... 204
Table 17-7 SysEx Message Structure for Insert/Bypass Group EQ Overlay (MIDI 02) ........................... 204
Table 17-8 Message Fields for Insert/Bypass Group EQ Overlay (MIDI 02) ........................................... 204
Table 17-9 SysEx Message Structure for Mute/Unmute Group Input (MIDI 03) ...................................... 205
Table 17-10 Message Fields for Mute/Unmute Group Input (MIDI 03) .................................................... 205
Table 17-11 SysEx Message Structure for Mute/Unmute Group Input (MIDI 04) .................................... 206
Table 17-12 Message Fields for Mute/Unmute Group Input (MIDI 04) .................................................... 206
Table 17-13 SysEx Message Structure for Group Input Delay (MIDI 05)................................................. 207
xv
Contents
Table 17-14 Message Fields for Group Input Delay (MIDI 05)................................................................. 207
Table 18-1 Available Level Types in Adjust Factory Mode....................................................................... 223
Table 18-2 HPF and LPF Types ............................................................................................................... 230
Table 18-3 Classic Crossover Types ........................................................................................................ 230
Table 18-4 Linear Phase Crossover Types .............................................................................................. 230
Table 18-5 Alignment Delay...................................................................................................................... 231
Table 18-6 Output EQ Types .................................................................................................................... 231
Table 18-7 EQ Types................................................................................................................................ 233
Table A-1 Recommended Private IP Addresses ...................................................................................... 240
xvi
Chapter 1
Introduction
DolbyLakeControllersoftwareprovidesaunifiedinterfacefortheDolbyLakeProcessor,
LakeContourTM,andLakeMesaQuadEQTMprocessors.Optimizedforawirelesstouchscreen
ortabletPC,theControllerusesauniquegraphicinterfacethatbringsbackthefeelofanalog
fadersandcontrols.ThesoftwareoperatesonanyMicrosoftWindowsPCwithastandard
Ethernetnetworkinterface.
1.1
Controller Overview
UsingtheControllersoftware,asoundengineercancontroladistributednetworkof
processorsfromasinglelocation.Instantadjustmentscanbemadetoanyparameterofany
processoronthenetwork,ortoselectedgroupsofprocessors.Bycreatinggroups,the
ControllercandelivertheappropriateEQandlevelsettingstoalarge,segmentedsound
system.
Eachprocessorcanbeamemberofmorethanonegroup.Forexample,atraditionalarena
sizedsystemcomprisesseveralleftandrightmainstacks,side,front,anddownfills,and
multiplelevelsofdelaystodifferentsubsystems.Typicaltechnologyrequiresachainof
processingunitstoenableanoverallstereomasterandvarioussubmasterstoindividually
controlequalization,dynamics,andgain.
Incontrast,theControllercanusemultiplegroupstosendglobaladjustmentstoallPAareas
whilestillprovidingindependentcontrolofindividualsystemcomponents.
1.2
Manual Overview
Thismanualprovidessoftwareinstallationinstructions,atutorialfornewusers,andfull
detailreferenceinformationforallsoftwarefunctionsandfeaturesoftheDolbyLake
Controlleruserinterface.
Themanualisorganizedasfollows:
Chapter1,Introduction.
Chapter2,DolbyLakeControllerInstallation,providesallthedetailsforinstallingthe
DolbyLakeControllersoftware,settingupyourvideodisplay,configuringyourPCs
networkinginterfacesforbothwiredandwirelessoperation,andverifyingyour
connectiontotheDolbyLakeProcessorhardware.
Chapter3,DolbyLakeControllerTutorial,providesatutorialthatintroducesyoutothe
featuresofthesoftware,andtheterminologyutilizedintheuserinterface.
Chapter4,HomeMenuReference,describesallofthetoplevelfunctionsofthebutton
barlocatedatthebottomoftheDolbyLakeControlleruserinterface.
Chapter5,EQ/LevelsMenuReference,detailsallofthefunctionsfoundwithinthe
EQ/Levelsmenu.Thismenuprovidesthemostcommonlyusedfunctionswithinthe
DolbyLakeController.
Introduction
Chapter6,SystemStoreandRecallMenuReference,describesallmenufunctions
relatedtosavingandrecallingsystemconfigurationfiles.
Chapter7,ModulesMenuReference,detailsallofthefunctionsfoundintheModules
menu,includinghowtosaveandrecallmodulefiles,SuperModulefunctionality,
adjustingtheI/OconfigurationofModulesandSuperModules,andaccessingother
modulespecificfunctions.
Chapter8,ModuleFileTypes,providesareferenceforalloftheavailablemodulefile
types,includingtraditionalcrossovers,linearphasecrossovers,andMesaEQTMmodules.
Chapter9,GroupsMenuReference,describesgroups,whichprovideasophisticated
waytopartitioncomplexsystems,enablingsystemwidecontrolofEQandLevelsinreal
time.Thischapterdetailsallfunctionsrelatedtocreatingandassigningmodulesto
groups.
Chapter10,Solo/MuteMenuReference,detailsthefunctionsassociatedwiththe
Solo/Mutemenufunctionality.
Chapter11,IconControlMenuReference,describeshowtochangethesizeofmodule
iconswithintheinterface,aswellashowtochangemetericonviews.
Chapter12,UserPreferencesMenuReference,providesexplanationofthevarious
functionscontainedintheUserPreferencesmenu,includingaccesstoDesignerMode,
daylightoperation,Showmode,andmore.
Chapter13,PagesMenuReference,detailsthefunctionsassociatedwithaddingand
namingnewpagedisplayswithintheuserinterface.
Chapter14,NetworkMenuReference,showsyouhowtochangebetweenavailable
networks,anddetailsMultipleControllerfunctionality.
Chapter15,CommunicationandSynchronization,describeshowtheDolbyLake
Controllersynchronizestohardwareprocessors,andprovidesexplanationsand
suggestionsonhowtoresolveissuesthatmayariseduetonetworkproblems,suchas
movingoutofrangeofawirelessaccesspoint.
Chapter16,KeyboardShortcutsReference,detailsallkeyboardshortcutsprovided.
Chapter17,ExternalControlInterfaces,describestheavailableexternalcontrolinterfaces
supportedbytheDolbyLakeController,includingAMX,Crestron,andMIDI.
Chapter18,DesignerModeReference,detailsallofthesecurityfeaturesprovidedbythe
DesignerModeofoperation.
Chapter19,FirmwareUpgradeProcess,presentsthemethodsinwhichyoucanupdate
thefirmwareofyourhardwareprocessorsusingtheControllerandassociatedutilities.
IfyouareusingtheControllerforthefirsttime,werecommendreadingthroughthetutorial
inChapter3tobecomefamiliarwiththefeaturesandterminology.Forinformationon
Processorhardware,pleaserefertotheDolbyLakeProcessorSystemManual.
TheinformationinthismanualisbasedontheuseatabletPC,whichutilizesapeninterface
insteadofamouse.Thereforethewordtapisusedinsteadofclickwhenreferringtotapping
thepenonthescreen,whichisequivalenttotappingtheleftmousebutton.Ifyouareusinga
mouseinsteadofapen,simplysubstituteaclickofyourmousewhenyouseetheinstruction
totap.
Chapter 2
Dolby Lake Controller

Installation
Theseinstallationinstructionsarebasedontheassumptionthatyouhavesomeknowledgeof
basicMicrosoftWindowsconcepts,suchashowtoselectmenuitems,locatefoldersand
files,andrunprograms.FormoreinformationonWindows,pleaseconsultyourWindows
documentation.
BeforeinstallingtheDolbyLakeControllersoftware,pleasereadthelicenseagreement
presentedatthebeginningoftheinstaller.
2.1
Computer Requirements and Configuration
2.1.1
Recommended PC Specifications
1GHzorfaster
512MBRAMorgreater
128MBvideoRAMorgreater
WindowsXPorWindowsVista
MicrosoftDirectX8.1orlater(preinstalledwithWindowsXP)
100BaseTwiredEthernetadapterand/or802.11wirelessEthernetadapter
Wirelessnetworkingrequiresthepreconfiguredwirelessnetworkingpackageavailablefrom
Dolby(orequivalent).
2.1.2
Video Card Settings

Itisimportantthatthevideocardisconfiguredcorrectlytoensuresmoothoperationofthe
DolbyLakeControllersoftware.Incorrectvideocardsettingsmayresultinproblemsor
unusualbehaviorofthegraphicsdisplayontheController.
Inadditiontothesettingspresentedbelow,pleasevisityourvideocardmanufacturers
websiteanddownloadthelatestdriversforyourspecificvideocard.Thevideodriversthat
comepreinstalledaspartofyourWindowsdistributionareusuallyoutofdateanddonot
includeenhancementsprovidedbythevideocardmanufacturersdrivers.Almostallvideo
cardissuescanberesolvedbyupdatingyourvideocarddrivertothelatestreleaseversion.
Recommendedvideocardsettings:
Dolby Lake Controller Installation
Displayresolution1,024by768pixels;800by600pixelresolutionissupportedbut
providesalowerqualityinterfacewithsomefeatureslessaccessibleorunavailable.
Color16bit.
3DaccelerationSetforbestperformancewithantialiasingturnedoff.
ClearTypeEnabled(WindowsXPonly).
1.
Toverifyyourdisplaysettings,navigatetoDisplayPropertiesusingtheWindows
ControlPanel:
StartMenuSettingsControlPanelDisplayDisplayProperties,Appearance
2.
TaptheEffectsbuttontoopenthefollowingdialogboxandconfirmthatClearType
hasbeenspecifiedandselected.
2.1.3
Tablet PC and Laptop Power Settings

WhenusingawirelesstabletorlaptopPCwiththeDolbyLakeController,youmayneedto
switchoffpowersavingfeatures,whichcanreducetheperformanceofyourPC.
IfyouexperienceslowerperformancewhileusingtheControlleronbatterypower,turnoff
anybatterypowersavingsettingsthataffectgeneralperformanceofyourPC.Somebattery
optimizationsalsoaffectwirelessconnectionspeed;ifyouexperienceaslowwireless
connectionwhileinBatterymode,thesesettingsshouldbedisabled.
Toturnoffpowersavingfeatures,navigateusingtheWindowsControlPanel:
StartMenuSettingsControlPanelPowerOptions
Assettingsvarydependingoneachtabletorlaptop,pleaseconsulttheappropriatehardware
manualforfurtherinformation.
2.1.4
Tablet PC Input Panel Settings

WindowsXPTabletEditionprovidesthepenactionStartInputPanelgesture,whichstarts
thetabletInputPanel(keyboardorwritingpad).Thisgestureisaquickmovementofthepen
fromsidetoside.IftheInputPanelappearswhileusingtheDolbyLakeController,itwill
causeflickeringbecauseboththeControllerandtheInputPanelattempttobeinthe
foreground.
TodisabletheInputPanelgesture:
1.
AccessTabletandPenSettingsthroughtheWindowsControlPanel.
StartMenuSettingsControlPanelTabletandPenSettings,PenOptions
2.
SelectthePenOptionstab.
3.
SelectStartInputPanelgesture,andtapSettings.
4.
UnchecktheboxlabeledEnablestartInputPanelgesture.
5.
TapOK.
6.
TapOKagaintosaveyourchanges.
2.2
Software Installation
ToinstalltheDolbyLakeController,inserttheCDROMintotheCDROMdrive.Thefirst
timeyoudothis,theAutoPlayfeaturewillpresentadialogbox.ToruntheSetupprogram,
chooseInstallDolbyLakeController,andthenfollowtheinstructionsthatappearonthe
screen.
Alternatively,ifyouhavedownloadedtheDolbyLakeControllersoftwareinstallerfromthe
Internet,doubletaptheinstallerexecutabletostarttheinstallationprocess.
TheDolbyLakeControllerSetupprogramwillguideyouthroughsoftwareinstallation.
1.
Readandenterinstallationinformationasrequired,andtapNexttoproceedthroughthe
installationdialogboxes.
2.
TapInstallwhenrequested.
3.
TapFinishwheninstallationiscomplete.
Followingsuccessfulinstallation,theDolbyLakeControllericonappearsonthedesktop.
Note: BeforeusingtheDolbyLakeControllerwithanetworkofhardwareprocessors,
pleasefollowtheconfigurationproceduresdescribedinSection2.3.
2.3
PC Networking Setup
2.3.1
How Networking Works

TheTCP/IPprotocolsuiteisstructuredinlayersasillustratedinFigure21.Thelinklayeris
EthernetandisresponsibleforconnectingtothecablingandEthernetswitches.For
communicationtooccur,eachdevicemusthaveavalidIPaddress.TheIPlayerusesthese
addressestoroutepacketsbetweendevices.Thetransportlayerprovidesflowsofdataandis
usedbyapplicationstocommunicatewitheachotheroverthenetwork.
TheDolbyLakeControllerusesUDPmessagingtocommunicatewithDolbyLakeProcessors
onthenetwork.Networksetupandconfigurationisfastandeasy;simplyhookupallthe
devicesonthenetwork,andtheDolbyLakeControllersoftwaredetectsandcommunicates
withalldevicesasrequired.
PC Networking Setup
Figure 2-1 TCP/IP Protocol Suite
AllhardwareDolbyLakeProcessorsareconfiguredtouseAutomaticPrivateAddressing
whichallocatesIPaddressesfromtherange169.254.x.x.Inmostscenarios,thisautomatic
allocationsettingwillnotneedtobechanged.However,iftheProcessorswillbepartofa
moresophisticatednetworksetupaspartofalargerinstallation,youcanchangetheIP
addressallocationmethodusingtheDolbyLakeControllersoftware.
2.3.2
IP Address Configuration
ThenetworkcardofthehostcomputerrunningtheDolbyLakeControllermusthaveavalid
IPaddresstocommunicatewithDolbyLakeProcessorsonthenetwork.
Bydefault,WindowscomputersareconfiguredtoobtainanIPaddressautomatically.This
defaultsetupworkssuccessfullyformostconfigurationsandistherecommendedstarting
point.OnanunmanagednetworkthisoptionwillallocatethePCanIPaddressfromthe
range169.254.x.x.
IfusingautomaticIPaddressallocation,pleaseensureyourEthernetswitchand/orDolby
LakeProcessorsareturnedonandconnectedtoyourPCforaminuteorsobeforestarting
theDolbyLakeController.ThisallowsWindowstimetocorrectlyidentifyyourPCsIP
address,andthereforeallowstheDolbyLakeControllertocommunicateproperlywhenit
scansthenetwork.
Ifyouareonamanagednetwork(suchasacorporatenetwork)withaDHCPserverandyou
arehavingcommunicationproblems,itisrecommendedthatyouchangetheIPaddressing
modeontheProcessorstouseDHCP.Pleaseconsultanetworkspecialistifyouhavetrouble
withcomplexnetworkconfigurations.
AfixedIPaddressisusefulifyouarefrequentlyswitchingbetweennetworkadapters,or
unpluggingandrepluggingyournetworkcable.TheautomaticIPaddressallocationusedby
Windowsrequiresavalidnetworktobepresent,andcantakearoundoneminuteforthePC
todiscoveritsIPaddress.InthiscaseitisrecommendedthatyoutryusingafixedIP
address,forexampleinthe10.10.x.xrange,withasubnetmaskof255.255.0.0.
YoucanspecifyafixedIPaddressbyfollowingthesesteps:
1.
OpenNetworkConnectionsfromtheWindowsStartmenu.
2.
Doubletaptheappropriatenetworkconnection(LocalAreaConnectionorWireless
NetworkConnection)toconfigure.
Note: AlthoughthistutorialusesLocalAreaConnectionasanexample,theprinciplesalso
applytoWirelessNetworkConnection.
10
PC Networking Setup
3.
SelectInternetProtocol(TCP/IP),andtapthePropertiesbutton.
4.
SelectUsethefollowingIPaddress,thenenteraclassA,B,orCfixedIPaddressand
appropriatesubnetmask.
5.
TapOKtoapplychanges,andexitInternetProtocol(TCP/IP)Properties.
6.
TapOKtoapplychanges,andexitLocalAreaConnectionProperties.
Note: PleaserefertoAppendixAformoreinformationontheselectionofanappropriate
IPaddress.
11
2.3.3
Wired Network Setup

TheDolbyLakeControllerhostcomputercanbeconnecteddirectlytoanyDolbyLake
ProcessorthrougheitheritsfrontorrearpanelEthernetconnectors.MultipleProcessorscan
beconnectedbycascadingconnectionsbetweenunits,Thisisnotarecommendednetwork
setupforthesuccessfuluseofDante(DigitalAudioNetworkingviaEthernet).Connecting
devicesviaagoodqualityexternalEthernetswitchisrecommended.Pleasereferto
Section2.3.9forfurtherinformation.
Thedevicescanbeinterconnectedusingawiredorwirelessnetwork.Thewirednetworkisa
simplersolutionandshouldbeimplementedinpreferencetousingawirelesssystem.If
ContourTMPro26/MesaQuadEQTMProcessorsarebeingusedinconjunctionwithDante,
additionalconfigurationofanexternalEthernetswitchisrequiredtofilterDanteaudiotraffic
fromreachingthese10Mbpsdevices.PleaserefertoSection2.3.8.
TheControllercanconnectanywhereonanetworkofmultipleProcessors.LEDsnexttoeach
portflashtoconfirmvalidcommunication.PleaseconnecttheControllercomputertothe
networkwithanEthernetcable,andfollowtheverificationstepsinthenextsection.
2.3.4
Verifying Controller and Processor Communication

Oncethenetworkisconnected,followthesestepstoconfirmcommunicationbetweenthe
DolbyLakeControllerandDolbyLakeProcessors:
1.
DoubletaptheDolbyLakeControllershortcuticonfromtheWindowsdesktop.The
SelectNetworkAdapterdialogbox(shown)appearsifyourcomputerhasmorethan
onenetworkinterfaceenabled.ThistypicallyoccursifyourPChasbothwiredand
wirelessnetworkinterfaces.
Note: ItisrecommendedthatonlyonenetworkadapterbeenabledonyourPCwhenusing
theDolbyLakeControllersoftware.Networkadapterscanbedisabledbyright
clickingtherelevantadapterviatheWindowsStart>ControlPanel>Network
ConnectionsandchoosingDisable.
2.
12
SelecttheEthernetadaptercurrentlyusedforthenetwork(thewiredadapterforthis
example).
PC Networking Setup
WhentheControllerbegins,youwillbepromptedwithadialogboxaskingwhethertoload
thelastconfiguration.
3.
TapNotothisdialog.TheMainpageoftheControllerdisplays.
4.
ToverifythattheProcessorsareonthenetworkandcommunicating,taptheModules
button.Themodulescrollbardisplays.
Theiconsontheleftofthemodulescrollbarrepresentvirtualframes,whicharealways
availablewhetherornotthenetworkisconnected.Virtualframesallowyoutocreatea
completesystemconfigurationoffline.
Ifyournetworkconnectionsarevalid,allProcessorsconnectedtothenetworkappearonthe
modulescrollbartotherightofthevirtualframes.
Inthepreviousfigure,theA,B,C,andDmodulesareencircledinaframethatvisually
representsoneDolbyLakeProcessoroperatinginLoudspeakerProcessormode.When
operatinginEQmode,theProcessorisshownaseightmoduleiconsinoneframe.The
numberofprocessingmodulesshowninthescrollbardependsontheconfigurationofyour
Processor.PleaserefertothetutorialinChapter3formoreinformationonmodulesand
frames.
2.3.5
Wireless Network Setup

Severalhardwaremanufacturerssupplywirelessnetworkingsolutionsthatadheretothe
various802.11wirelessEthernetstandards.ThismeansthatanystandardEthernet802.11
wirelessnetworkingsolutionshouldworkwiththisnetworksystem.
However,afterextensivetestingofavailablewirelessnetworkingsolutions,wehavefound
thatperformancevariestremendouslyamongvendors.Atroublefree,preconfigured
wirelessnetworkingpackageisavailablefromDolby.Pleasevisitwww.dolby.com/livesound for
furtherinformation.
13
WhenusingawirelessaccesspointonthesamenetworkasDantedigitalaudio,anapproved
externalEthernetswitchmustbeconfiguredtofilterDanteaudiopacketsfromreachingthe
wirelessnetwork.PleaserefertoSection2.3.8forfurtherinformation.
Note: Althoughthefollowinginstructionsarespecifictothepreconfiguredwireless
networkingpackageavailablefromDolby,themajorityoftheconceptsand
terminologiestranslatedirectlyforother802.11solutions.
AnaccesspointisusedinawirelessEthernetnetworkconfigurationtoconnectDolbyLake
ProcessorstotheDolbyLakeControllerhostcomputer.Anaccesspointlookslikeanexternal
modemwithtwosmallantennas.Thisradiobasedreceiver/transmitterisconnectedtothe
wirednetworkusingstandardEthernetcables.Itperformsthesamefunctionasaswitch:
receiving,buffering,andtransmittingdatabetweenwiredandwirelessnetworks.
Figure 2-2 Basic Wireless Setup (Not Suitable for Use with Dante)
Ideally,theprocedurejustdescribedyieldsaperfectlyfunctionalandsecuresystem.
However,therearetwocomplications:Someenvironmentshaveadditionalwirelessnetwork
systemsandcommunicationsequipmentcompetingforthesameairspaceusedbytheDolby
Lakesystem.Itisalsoimportanttoprovidesecuritysoanotherwirelessnetworkcannot
accessthisnetworksystem.
Aspartofthe802.11standard,variouslevelsofaccesscontrolandencryptionexist.Thereare
alsodifferentcommunicationchannelsthatoperateatdifferentfrequencies.
Theservicesetidentifier(SSID)controlsaccesstothiswirelessnetworkbyfunctioningasa
passwordorkeybetweenwirelessnetworkdevicestodifferentiatethemfromeachother.
TheSSIDmustbeexactlythesameonallwirelessdevices(theaccesspointandallController
hostcomputers).TheSSIDiscasesensitive.
AlthoughtheSSIDdifferentiatesamongwirelesssystems,itdoesnotprovidesecuritytothe
network.WiredEquivalentPrivacy(WEP)isasecurityprotocolforwirelessnetworks
definedinthe802.11standard.TheWEPprotocolprovidesthesamelevelofsecurityasa
wirednetworkbyencryptingdataoverradiowavestoprotectitduringtransmission.
ThepreconfigurednetworkingpackagesetstheSSIDforyou.TheSSIDcanbefoundonthe
backofpreconfiguredaccesspoints,andisanumberuniquetoyourwirelessaccesspackage.
14
PC Networking Setup
WEPencryptionisnotenabled.Thisshouldbenecessaryonlyifyouplanonusingan
existingLANthatincludessensitiveinformation.WerecommendthatWEPencryptionbe
enabledifanyothercomputersareconnectedtoyourEthernetnetwork.
TomakeaconnectionbetweentheControllerPCandtheaccesspoint,locatetheSSIDfound
onthelabelonthebackofyouraccesspoint.Ifyouareusinganaccesspointthathasnot
beenpreconfigured,pleaserefertoyourspecificaccesspointsdocumentationforfurther
information.
2.3.6
Configuring the Tablet PC for Wireless Networking

Assumingthattheaccesspointhasbeenpreconfiguredandsetupappropriately,wenow
needtoconfigurethetabletPCtoconnecttothisaccesspoint.
ToconfigurethetabletPC:
1.
OpenNetworkConnections,anddoubletapWirelessNetworkConnection.
2.
TapAdvanced,thentapAddtoaddapreferrednetwork.
3.
Specifythenetworkname,exactlyasyouhaveitconfiguredontheaccesspoint.
RemembertheSSIDiscasesensitive.
15
4.
TapOKtocontinue.TheSSIDwillnowappearinthePreferrednetworkslist.
5.
SelecttheGeneraltab,scrolldowntoInternetProtocol(TCP/IP),andtapProperties.
16
PC Networking Setup
6.
IfthisscreenshowsObtainanIPaddressautomaticallyandyouareencountering
problems,enteraclassA,B,orCfixedprivateIPaddress,andappropriatesubnetmask,
ensuringitisunique.(DonotusethesameIPaddressthatyouallocatedtotheaccess
point.)TapOK.
Note: PleaserefertoAppendixAformoreinformationontheselectionofanappropriate
IPaddress.
7.
TapOKagain.ApopupmessagewillappearintheWindowsicontray.
2.3.7
Confirming Wireless Operation of the Dolby Lake Controller

Toconfirmwirelessoperation:
1.
DoubletaptheDolbyLakeControllericontostartthesoftware.Ifyouhavemorethan
onenetworkadapterenabled,theSelectNetworkAdapterdialogboxwillbedisplayed;
selectWirelessNetworkAdapter.
2.
TapNowhenaskedwhethertorecallthelastconfiguration.Abriefresyncmessagewill
appearforeachDolbyLakeProcessoronyournetwork,confirmingthatyournetwork
connectionisoperatingproperly.
3.
TapModules.EachonlineProcessorisrepresentedonthemodulescrollbarastwo
moduleiconssurroundedbyaframe.
4.
TapQuitControllertoexit.
17
2.3.8
Using Dante in Conjunction with Wireless Data Control or LowBandwidth Devices

Dante(DigitalAudioNetworking)technologyrequiresa100Mbpsnetworktooperate,and
thereforecannotoperateviaawirelesstransmitter/receiver.However,itislikelyinaDolby
LakenetworkthatwirelesscontroloftheDolbyLakeProcessorsisrequiredonthesame
networkthatistransmittingandreceivingDantedigitalaudiosignals.
Toachievethis,youmustconfiguretheEthernetswitchontheboundaryofthewireless
networktofilterDantetrafficfromreachingthe10Mbpsaccesspointorotherlower
bandwidthdevicessuchasContourPro26/MesaQuadEQProcessors,oryouwillmostlikely
experiencecommunicationproblems.
Thediagrambelowsummarizesthedesiredoutcomefromcorrectlyconfiguringyour
EthernetswitchtofilterDanteaudiopackets.
Dante Device
Multicast Audio
Linksys SRW224G4
Dante Audio
Network
Higher Latency (wireless)

or
Lower Bandwidth Networks
Multicast Audio
Low Bandwidth
Device
PleaserefertotheAudinatedocumentAUD-ANO-ACL_Filtering_SRW224G4-V2.4.pdfforfurther
detailsregardingfiltering,locatedintheLiteraturesectionoftheDolbyLakeController
softwareinstaller,orfromoursoftwaredownloadrequestpage:
http://www.dolby.com/professional/live_sound/support_download/lsdr_form.aspx
OrfindfurtherDantesupportinformationonthesupportforum:
http://livesoundforum.dolby.com/
18
PC Networking Setup
2.3.9
Dante with Quality o Service Ethernet Switches

TheuseofanexternalEthernetswitchwithQoS(QualityofService)isstrongly
recommendedwhenusingDantedigitalaudiooveryourDolbyLakenetwork.Danteuses
standardnetworkQoStechniquesavailableinofftheshelfEthernetswitchestoprioritize
clockingandaudiotraffic,andtoallownonDantedevicessuchaspersonalcomputersto
shareasinglenetworkwithDantedevices.Thediagrambelowshowstheorderofpriority
giventothedifferenttypesofdatapacketsgoingthroughtheswitch.Usingaswitchwithout
QoS,orwithQoSturnedoffonabusynetwork,mayresultinaudiopacketsarrivingtoolate
tobeplayedout,resultinginaudioglitches.
PleaserefertotheAudinatedocumentAUD-ANO-QoS_Switch_Configuration-Dolby-V1.1.pdffor
furtherdetailsregardingQoS,locatedintheliteraturesectionoftheDolbyLakeController
softwareinstaller,orfromoursoftwaredownloadrequestpage:
19
2.3.10
Recommended Network Topologies When Using Dante

TheuseofanexternalEthernet100MbpsswitchwithQoS(QualityofService)ishighly
recommended.Itisalsorecommendedthateachprocessorhasitsowndirectconnectionto
thatswitch.Whereswitchesareconnectedtogether,thisshouldbeachievedviaagigabit
fiberorcopperconnection.
TwoDolbyLakeProcessorsmaybedaisychainedtogetherandrunDante.
20
PC Networking Setup
MorethantwoDolbyLakeProcessorsshouldnotbedaisychainedtogetherwhenDanteis
beingused.
TheuseofDanteacrosswirelessnetworksasshownbelowisnotsupported.
PleaserefertotheAudinatedocumentAUD-ANO-QoS-RecommendedNetworkTopologies-V1.2.pdf
forfurtherdetailsregardingnetworktopologies,locatedintheLiteraturesectionofthe
DolbyLakeControllersoftwareinstaller,orfromoursoftwaredownloadrequestpage:
21
Chapter 3
Dolby Lake Controller

Tutorial
ThistutorialwillhelpyoustartusingtheDolbyLakeControllersoftwarequicklyand
easilybyprovidinganoverviewofcommonfeatures.Therearemanyunderlyingdetailsnot
coveredinthistutorial,sopleaserefertotheothersectionsofthismanualfordetailed
referenceinformation.
Thetutorialexampleswillguideyouthroughbasicsetupprocedures.Youmusthaveatleast
oneDolbyLakeProcessorconnectedtotheControllertoproceedwiththistutorial.
Additionally,thetutorialisbasedontheassumptionthatyouarestartingwithafactoryreset
Processor,whichistheconfigurationthatrunswhenyoufirstpoweronyourProcessorout
oftheshippingcontainer.Ifnecessary,pleaserefertotheDolbyLakeProcessorSystemManual
forinformationonhowtorestorethefactoryconfiguration.
3.1
Starting the Dolby Lake Controller

TostarttheDolbyLakeController:
1.
DoubletaptheDolbyLakeControllersoftwareiconlocatedontheMicrosoftWindows
desktop.
2.
TapNointhedialogboxaskingifyouwouldliketorecallthelastconfiguration.
Note: TappingYesloadstheconfigurationthatwasinusethelasttimetheController
softwarewasclosed.Thisconfigurationisthencomparedtowhatisfoundonthe
network,andanydifferencesaredistinguishedinthesoftware.Noaudioprocessing
willbeaffectedbyrecallingthelastknownconfiguration.
23
Dolby Lake Controller Tutorial
TheMainpageappearsandisinitsdefault,blankstate.
3.2
Overview of Main Page Components

Thissectioncoversthevariouscomponentsshownonthemainpage.
3.2.1
Button Bar Interface

Thebuttonbar,locatedatthebottomofeverypageinthesoftware,isusedtonavigate
throughandactivatetheDolbyLakeControllerfeaturesandfunctions.Threecolorsindicate
thebuttonstatus:
OrangeCurrentlyselectedmenuorfunction
BlueAvailablemenuorfunctionbasedoncurrentselection
GrayCurrentlyunavailablemenuorfunction
24
Overview of Main Page Components
Thefollowingbuttonsarealwaysavailableontheleftsideofthebuttonbar:
ThebuttonwiththenumberedarrowspointingupwardistheContextbutton,whichenables
fastsystemnavigation.Contextsallowyoutojumpdirectlyfromoneviewtoanotherview
withouthavingtousethetoolbarfornavigation.Forfurtherdetail,pleasereferto
Section12.1.
Thebuttonwitharrowspointingrightisactivewhenapageormenuscrollbarcontains
moreinformationthancanbedisplayedonthewidthofthescreen.Tapthisbuttontomove
thescrollbar,pages,oroverlaytabstotheright,revealingadditionaldata.
TheHomebuttonisavailablefromalmostallmenulevels,andreturnsyoutotheMainpage
ofthesystem.
Thefollowingbuttonsarealwaysavailableontherightsideofthebuttonbar:
Thebuttonwitharrowspointingleftmovesthescrollbar,pages,oroverlaytabstotheleft,
revealingadditionaldata.
ThebuttonlabeledUndo(orRedoafterUndohasbeenused)providesasinglelevel
Undo/RedofunctionforadjustmentsmadetoEQ/levelsandcrossovers(whereapplicable).
Generally,thelabelsonbuttonsdescribethesubmenuopenedorthefunctionperformedby
tappingthebutton.
3.2.2
Help and Status Messages

Contextsensitivehelpisdisplayedabovethebuttonbarontheleft.
25
Systemstatusmessagesaredisplayedabovethebuttonbarontheright.Inthefollowing
example,thenetworkstatusisshowntobeoffline.
3.2.3
Page Tabs
Atthetopleftoftheuserinterface,theMaintabandAlltabarepresented.TheMainpageis
thedefaultpagereadytouse.TheAllpageprovidesmonitoringof260modulesona1,024
768pixelscreenwithoutscrolling.Itdisplaysastatussummaryforeachmodule,with
additionalstatusinformationforLab.gruppenamplifiers.Morepagescanbeaddedas
requiredtologicallypartitionyoursystem.
Forfurtherdetails,pleaserefertoSection7.7.
3.2.4
Minimizing the Lake Controller

TominimizetheDolbyLakeControllersoftwareandreturntoWindows,taptheLakeiconin
thetoprightcornerofanyscreen.
Thisiconisanimated.Itrotateswhenthesoftwareisperforminganyfunctionthatrequires
theusertowaitfordatatobetransferredorloaded.
3.3
Modules and Frames
3.3.1
Overview
AframerepresentsonephysicalDolbyLakeProcessoronthenetwork(oranotherproduct
thatcontainsLakeContourTM/MesaEQTMfunctionality).Multiplemodulesarecontained
withineachframe.Thenumberofmodulesshowninagivenframeisdependentuponthe
signalprocessingconfiguration/capabilitiesfortheframe.
TheDolbyLakeProcessorprovidesthreedifferentsignalprocessingconfigurations.
26
Modules and Frames
Table 3-1 Dolby Lake Processor Signal Processing Configurations
Configuration Mode
Description
Contour
412loudspeakerprocessor
Mesa
88systemequalizer
26loudspeaker
processor
Contour&Mesa
44systemequalizer
YoucanchooseanyoneofthesemodeswhenconfiguringtheDolbyLakeProcessor,and
eachmodeprovidesadifferentnumberofmodules.
Table 3-2 Number of Modules in Different Processor Configurations
Configuration
Number of Modules
ContourLoudspeakerProcessor
FourContour
MesaSystemEqualizer
EightMesa
Contour&Mesa
TwoContourandfourMesa
Figure 3-1 Contour Frame
Figure 3-2 Mesa Frame
Figure 3-3 Contour & Mesa Frame
Forthistutorial,weconfiguretheProcessortooperateinContour&Mesamode,sowecan
seebothtypesofmodulesonthesameframe.
27
3.3.2
Changing to Contour & Mesa Mode

FromtheMainpage,tapModules.Themodulescrollbarwillappearwitheitherfour
ContourmodulesoreightMesaEQmodules.Thedefaultfactoryresetstatedependsonthe
analogcardconfigurationofyourDolbyLakeProcessor.
ThefollowingexampleshowsfourContourmodules:
WithoneProcessoronthenetworkconfiguredasaloudspeakerprocessor,themodulescroll
bardisplaysvirtualframeiconsandfourContourmodules.
Note: AvirtualframeisalwaysaccessiblewhetherornottheDolbyLakeControlleris
connectedtoanetworkofProcessors.Virtualframesallowofflineadjustmentof
moduleparameters,whichenablesentiresystemstobedesignedoffline.Virtual
framescanbereplacedwithonlineframesonceyouareconnectedtoasystem
network.
WenowneedtoplacetheContourmodulesontheMainpagetoenableadjustment:
1.
28
Inthescrollbar,tapmoduleAonce.Allfourmoduleiconsmoveoutofthescrollbar
withyourmouseorstylus.
Modules and Frames
2.
TaptheMainpagewhereyouwishtoplacethemodulesoftheselectedframe.
TheProcessorhardwarenowsynchronizeswiththeController.Duringthesynchronization
process,theControllergathersallofthecurrentsettingsofthehardwareProcessor.
3.
OncetheProcessorissynchronizedwiththeController,taptheI/OConfigbuttonto
bringuptheI/OConfigpage.Thisviewshowstheblockdiagramofthecurrentsignal
processingconfigurationoftheProcessor.
4.
TaptheFrameConfigbutton,andthentaptheContour/MEqResetbutton.
29
Followingthereset,themoduleiconsarereturnedtothescrollbar,withsixmodulesnow
displayedtwoContourmodulesandfourMesaEQmodules.
5.
Repeatthesamesequence,tappingamoduleinthescrollbarandplacingthemoduleson
theMainpage.
NowthatallthemoduleiconsareontheMainpage,wecanbeginadjustingeachmodules
parameters.Beforemakingsuchfurtheradjustments,letsreviewtheinformationdisplayed
bythemoduleicons.
3.3.3
Module Icons
EachmoduleiconprovidesconfigurationinformationasshowninFigure34.
Module Selection and Clip Indicator
Module ID
Input Mute Indicator
Frame Label
Module Type
Module Label
Output Mute Indicators
Figure 3-4 Module Components
30
ModuleIDIdentifiesthemoduledesignatoroftheProcessorrepresentedbythisicon.
FramelabelIdentifiestheframeassociatedwiththisiconbyauserdefinedlabelthat
alsoappearsontheProcessor.
ModuletypeIdentifiesthenumberofoutputchannelsoranabbreviationofamodule
typedescription(MEqforaMesaEQmodule).
ModulelabelAuserdefinedlabelthatdescribesthemodulesuseorspeakertype.
Modules and Frames
ModuleselectionandclipindicatorThemoduleiconborderisyellowtoindicatethe
moduleisselected.Ifitflashesred,achannelonthatmoduleisclipping.
InputmuteindicatorIfthecentralroundpartoftheiconisred,theinputismuted;if
theiconisblue,theinputisnotmuted.
OutputmuteindicatorsDisplayassmallredbarswhentheoutputsaremutedandare
absentifunmuted.Thenumberofmuteindicatorsdependsonthenumberofoutput
channelsintheselectedmoduletype.
ThedefaultconfigurationforaContourmoduleisasetof24dBperoctaveLinkwitzRiley
threewaycrossoverswithfrequenciescenteredat250and1,600Hz.Thedefaultmodule
labelisCL3way,whichisanabbreviationforClassic3Wayconfiguration.
ThedefaultconfigurationforaMesaEQmoduleisaflatfrequencyresponsewithoutanyEQ
filtersinserted.ThedefaultmodulelabelisMesaEQ.
3.3.4
Selecting and Moving Icons

Multipleiconsmaybeselected(viatheModules,Groups,Pages,andIconControlmenus),
providingafastersolutiontographicalarrangementoftheworkarea.
Forexample,multipleiconscanbedraggedbacktothescrollbar,moved,orcopiedto
anotherpagetab.
31
1.
Dragaboxaroundtheiconsyouwishtomove.
2.
Releasethepen(ormouse);iconsinsidetheyellowrectanglearenowselected.
3.
Tapinsidetheyellowbox,anddragittothenewarea.
32
Modules and Frames
4.
Releasethepen;theiconsarenowdeselected.
Todragiconstoanewpage,selecttheiconsyouwishtomoveandthendragthemoverthe
pagestabatthetop.Thatpagewillbeautomaticallyselected.Youmaythenplacetheicons
whererequired.
3.3.5
Labeling Frames and Modules

Theframelabelisinitiallyblank()intheDolbyLakeControllermoduleiconandonthe
frontpaneloftheDolbyLakeProcessor.Theframelabelismosthelpfulinidentifyingthe
physicallocationofaProcessorinadistributednetworkofhardwareprocessors.
Tonametheframe:
1.
TaptheAmoduletoselectit.Ayellowbordersurroundingthemoduleiconindicatesit
isselected.
Note: Ifamoduleisnotselected,mostofthebuttonbarfunctionsaregraytosignifythey
areinactive.
2.
TapLabel&Lock.
33
3.
TapLabelFrametodisplaytheonscreenkeyboard.
4.
TypeDemousingtheonscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard,ifavailable),andtap
OK.
TheframelabelfieldfortheframesmodulesdisplaysDemointhesoftware.
NowletsassignanametotheAmodule:
1.
TaptheAmoduletoselectit.
2.
SelectLabelModulefromthebuttonbar.
3.
NamethismoduleMy 3-Wayusingtheonscreenkeyboard,andtapOK.
4.
TapLabelExittoreturntotheModulesmenu.
Note: TolabelaSuperModule,selectitintheworkareaandtapLabelSuperMod.
34
Modules and Frames
3.3.6
I/O Config
1.
TaptheI/OConfigbuttontodisplaytheblockdiagramsofeachmoduleintheframe.
TherightsideoftheI/OConfigpagescrollsupanddowntoviewallmoduleblock
diagrams.
2.
Tapanyblackspacewithintheblockdiagramareaanddragupordowntoscroll.Asyou
scrolldown,youcanseetheMesaEQblockdiagramsaswell.TheI/OConfigpageis
interactive;eachblueprocessingblockcanbeselectedtodirectlyaccesstherelevant
screeninthesoftware.Eachblockdiagramhasafrontendinputmixer.
35
3.
TapanyoneofthefourinputsoftheMy3Waymoduletoaccesstheinputmixer.
Loudspeakerprocessormoduleshaveafullyfunctionalfourinputmixerthatallowsyouto
combineanyofthefourinputsasrequiredforyourparticularapplication.MesaEQmodules
haveaneightinputmixerforcombininginputs.
4.
36
Taptheexitbutton
inthebottomrightcorneroftheInputMixerpopupwindowto
returntotheI/OConfigscreen.
Modules and Frames
Eachoutputcanbecustomconfiguredbytheuseraswell.Taponeofthezoomicons
(representedbyamagnifyingglass)ontherightsideofthemodulesblockdiagram.This
actionwillopentheOutputConfigurationwindow.
TheOutputConfigurationwindowprovidestheabilitytorouteanyphysicalinputor
moduleoutputtoanyavailableanalogordigitaloutputontheDolbyLakeProcessor.The
arrowsbelowthesourceanddestinationlabelsallowselectionandmappingofallavailable
I/O.
5.
TapontheexitbuttoninthebottomrighttoreturntotheI/OConfigpage.
37
TheleftsideoftheI/OConfigpageprovidesbothclockandinputconfigurationfunctions.
Statusinformationisprovided,andzoomiconsopenpopupwindowsforaccessto
configurationparameters.
TheProcessorhasasophisticatedclocksystem,allowingyoutoselectbetweeninternaland
externalclocksourcesatallstandardaudiosamplerates.Bydefault,theProcessorusesits
internalclockoperatingat96kHz.Youcanchoosetouseanyavailableexternalclocksource
usingtheinterfaceprovidedbytheclocksourceconfigurationwindow.
ThecurrentPrimaryClockSourceisshownonthetopleftofthescreen,andthecurrent
SampleRateConverterClockSourceisshownonthetopright.Youcanchooseanyavailable
clocksourceusingtheClockSourceSelectorscrollbaratthebottomofthiswindow.
PleaserefertotheDolbyLakeProcessorSystemManualforfurtherdetailsonclocks,clock
sourcepriorities,samplerateconverters,andsignalprocessinglatency.
38
Modules and Frames
Theinputconfigurationpopoutwindowallowsflexibleroutingofallavailableinputsto
eachInputMixerchannelalongwithafourlevelautoselectpriorityallocationforeach
input,asshowninthefollowingscreenshot.
Fromthisinterface,youcanallocatewhichinputisusedforeachinputchanneloftheInput
Mixer,andinwhichorderuptofourinputsshouldautoselect(failover)foreachinput
channel.
TheinputAutoselectfeatureallowsyoutosetuparedundantsystem.TheProcessorwill
attempttousethefirstsignal.Ifthefirstsignalisunavailable,itwilltrythesecond,third,
andfourthsignals.
TappingDisplayDetailsallowscontrolofdigitalclockselection/digitalgainoffsetsand
analoginputheadroom:
39
TheGainOffsetfeatureallowsyoutofinetunethegainbetweendifferentdigitalandanalog
signalstoallowforaseamlesstransitionbetweenthesignalsources.
ThelastitemontheleftsideoftheI/OConfigpageallowsyoutoremotelycontrolIso
FloatTM.Thispowerfulfeatureallowsyoutotroubleshootgroundingissuesremotelyfromthe
Controller.
TheAnalogIsoFloatStatuswindowshowsyouthecurrentstateoftheProcessorhardware
andallowsyoutomakechangestothegroundingstateofeachanalogconvertercardwhen
thesoftwarecontrolfunctionhasbeenenabled.
AfterclosingtheAnalogIsoFloatStatuspopupwindow,returntotheMainpageby
tappingtheHomebutton.
Note: CobraNetfunctionsareavailableonlywhenaCobraNetcardisinstalled.
40
Modules and Frames
3.3.7
Dante
DanteaudionetworkingtechnologyfromAudinateprovidesahasslefreedigitalaudio
networkingsolutionfortheDolbyLakeProcessorwithextremelyreliable,sampleaccurate,
lowlatencyaudiodistributionoverEthernet.
Danteprovidesareliable,digitalaudionetworkingsystemwithcompleteflexibility,easeof
use,andcosteffectiveness.WithinnovativefeaturessuchasZen,DanteenabledDolbyLake
ProcessorsautomaticallyfindeachotherandprovidetheabilityforanyDanteaudiochannel
onthenetworktoberoutedtotheinputofoneormoreprocessors.
Dantecanbeeasilyintegratedintoanexistingnetwork,sharingthesystemwithnormaldata
traffic.And,ifyouwanttododigitalaudiorecording,processing,orplaybackusing
computerbasedprograms,theDantevirtualsoundcardenablesyoutojustplugthenetwork
directlyintothestandardEthernetportonaPCnoexternalboxesorsoundcardsare
required.
DanteisbuiltintotheDolbyLakeProcessor.Noadditionalhardwareisrequired.TheDolby
LakeProcessorsupportsupto8Danteaudioinputsand16Danteaudiooutputsoverasingle
Ethernetconnection.
TappingthezoombuttonlabeledDanteConfigurationdisplaysthefollowingscreen,with
Dantedisabledbydefault:
WhenDanteisenabled,bydefaulttheprocessorwillonlyreceiveaudio.Transmissionis
disabledinordertopreventclutterintheinputconfigurationscreen.Ifyouwishtotransmit
Dantechannelsfromthisprocessor,enablebyclickingontheTransmitOutputsbutton.
TransmitchannelsfromthisprocessorappearonthelistofallavailableDantechannelson
thenetwork.
41
WhenDanteisenabled,theInputConfigurationpagefortheselectedprocessorprovidesan
optiontoviewavailableDantechannelsonthenetwork.Anyofthesechannelscanbe
selectedastheinputsfortheprocessor:
Minimum Latency Options

ThislatencyisadditionalDantespecificlatencyusedtoensureuninterrupteddigitalaudio.
Thelatencyisaddedtothenormallatencyofyourchosensignalpathandmoduletype.
The0.8(default),1.3,and4msminimumreceivelatencyoptionsareprovidedtoallow
flexibilityforcomplexnetworks,orwhenusingswitcheswithoutQoS(QualityofService).
Higherlatencyreducesthechanceofaudioglitchesduetoaudiopacketsbeingdelayedvia
thenetwork,thereforeisrecommendedforcomplexnetworkscontainingmanyhops,orin
circumstanceswhereasmalldelayirrelevantandreliabilityisparamount.
UsingswitcheswithoutQoSisnotrecommended.Ifthisisthecase,thenthe4mslatency
optionshouldbeusedtominimizethechangeofaudioglitchesduetoaudiopacketsbeing
delayedduetobeingqueuedbehinddatapackets.
42
Modules and Frames
Transmit Outputs/Dante Output Channel Settings

WhentheTransmitOutputsbuttonisactive(orange),all16Dantechannelswillbe
advertisedontheDanteaudionetworkasavailablechannelsforanyotherDantereceiverto
useforitsinput(s).Inaddition,thisscreenprovidesAuto/Unicast/Multicastoptionsforeach
channel,andoutputchannellabelingfunctions:
Dante Output Channel Functions
TheAuto/Multi/Unioptionsprovidetheability,perchannel,tosetwhetherthatchannelis
goingtobeforcedasunicast(eachreceiverwillgetaseparatepointtopointaudioflow),
forcedasmulticast(manyreceiverscanlistentothesamemulticastflowsentbythe
transmitter),orautomaticallycontrolledbytheDantenetwork(unicastormulticastwillbe
selectedbasedonthenumberofreceiversforthischannel).Thisadvancedsettingcan
generallybeleftasAuto.
TappingthekeyboardbuttontotherightoftheUnibuttonwilldisplaytheonscreen
keyboardallowinguptoa31characternametobeenteredforthisDantechannel.Onthe
inputconfigurationofotherprocessors,theFramelabelalongwiththislabel(orchannel
numberifnolabelisdefined)willbeusedtouniquelyidentifytheavailableDantechannels
onthenetwork.
Usingmeaningfulchannellabelsisrecommendedbeforeconfiguringyoursystemroutingto
ensureerrorfreerouting.
43
3.3.8
Levels and Meters

FromtheMainpage,taptheMy3Waymoduleicontodisplayitsparameters.Thisaction
willentertheEQandLevelsinterfaceforthemodule,displayingtheEQscreenthefirsttime
itisaccessed.
TaptheLevelstabatthetopleftofthedisplaytoaccesstheLevelsinterface.Thisprovides
meteringinformationandfadersforadjustmentofgains,delays,andlimiters.
Bydefault,gaincontrolsandmetersaredisplayedfortheinputandalloutputsofthe
module.Mutecontrolsarelocatedbeloweachinputandoutputmeter,withapolaritybutton
fortheinput.
Tounmutethemoduleinput,taptheredmutebuttonlabeledInputMUTED.
Note: ThemoduleInputMutebuttonmutesorunmutesthepostinputmixersignal.Ifyou
wouldliketomakeadjustmentstothelevelsofeachphysicalinputtothehardware
processor,taptheInputMixerbuttonbelowthemoduleInputMutedbutton.
44
Modules and Frames
Adjusting Levels
Therearethreewaystoadjustthegainofaninputoroutput:
Makelargechanges(1dBincrements)bytappingandslidingthefader.
Makesmalladjustments(0.1dBincrements)bytappinganddraggingabove,below,orto
theleftofeachfadercontrol.
Adjustthegaintoanexactvalue(0.01dBincrements)bytappingthegainvaluedirectly
andusingtheonscreenkeyboardtoenterthenewvalueasfollows:
1.
Taptheinputgainvalue(highlightedinblueatthetopleftofthescreen).
2.
Enter3.75dBofgain,andtapOK.
Thesameprinciplesapplytoadjustingotherlevels(delays,limiters,andsoon)throughout
theDolbyLakeControllersoftware.
Toview/updateothertypesoflevels,simplytaptherequiredtypeoflevelfromthebutton
bar(Delay,LimiterMaxRMS,andsoon).Thefadersandlevelschangetodisplaythevalue
oftheselectedleveltype.
Metering
IntheLevelsinterface,allinputandoutputlevelsareaccompaniedbymetering.Input
metersshowbothaveragelevelandpeaklevel,withauserdefinablepeakhold.Output
metersshowtheaforementionedlevelmeteringontheleftsideofthemeterface,and
additionallyshowlimiteractivityontherightsideofthemeterface.
Note: Regardlessofwhatlevelcontrolyouarecurrentlyadjusting,gainandlimitermeters
alwaysdisplay.
Ifanaudiochannelisclipped,themeterfaceturnsred.Additionally,ifanaudiochannelis
within2dBofclipping,themeterfaceturnsorange.
45
Aslimitersareengaged,theamountofgainreductionisshownwithameteroperatinginthe
downwarddirection.
ThelimitermeterdisplaysthetotalamountoflimitingresultingfrombothpeakandRMS
limiterfunctionsoftheLimiterMaxTMloudspeakerprotectionsystem.
46
Equalization
3.4
Equalization
FromtheLevelsinterface,taptheEQtabinthetopleftcornerofthedisplaytomovetothe
EQcontrolsforthemodule.ParametricEQ(PEQ)isdisplayedbydefault.
MultipleEQoverlaysareidentifiedbytabsatthetopleftofthedisplay.Athreewaymodule
initiallyhasoneparametric(PEQ1)andonegraphic(GEQ2)overlay,inadditiontotheXover
tab.AMesaEQmodulehasatablabeledHPF/LPFinsteadofXover.
Theparametricoverlay(PEQ)provideslowshelf,parametric,Mesa,andhighshelffilters.
Thegraphicoverlay(GEQ)providesthirdoctaveEQcontrols.TheXoverscreenallows
selectionandadjustmentofcrossoverfilters,inadditiontooutputEQ.
3.4.1
Graphic EQ
1.
TaptheGEQ2overlaytoaccessthedefaultthirdoctavegraphicoverlay.Thebottom
sectionofthegraphicEQscreencontainstheEQTool,whichisusedtoselectafrequency
bandforgainadjustment.
2.
Toselectafrequencyband,tapanddragtheselectorleftorright.Toadjustgainofthe
selectedfilter,taptheredrotatingXandslideuptoboostordowntocut.
Note: IfFrequencyLockisoff(blue),thefrequencycanalsobeselectedandchangedby
directlytappinganddraggingayellowXfilterpointontheEQinterface.
47
3. TapFilterFlatonthebuttonbartoflattentheselectedfilter.
ManyotherfeaturesareavailableontheEQbuttonbar;pleaserefertoChapter5forfurther
details.
48
Equalization
3.4.2
Ideal Graphic EQ
AuniqueinnovationfoundwithintheDolbyLakeProcessor,Contour,andMesaEQ
processorsistheIdealGraphicEQTM.Conventionalanaloganddigitalgraphicequalizersdo
notprovideintuitiveresults.Forexample,pullingupthefadersonaconventionalgraphic
equalizertoboost6dBat500;630;800;1,000;1,250;1,600;and2,000Hzproducesthe
frequencyresponseshowninFigure35.
Figure 3-5 Conventional Graphic Equalization and Resulting Frequency Response
ThismeasuredfrequencyresponseisnotwhatyouwouldexpectfromthegraphicEQ
controls.
49
IfweusetheGEQoverlaytoboost6dBat500;630;800;1,000;1,250;1,600;and2,000Hz,the
frequencyresponseisshownbythebluetraceinFigure36.
Figure 3-6 Ideal Graphic EQ and Resulting Frequency Response
ToimplementthisEQoverlay:
1. Tapanddragthefiltertoolonthebottomto500Hz.
2. TapanddragtheredXupwarduntilthefiltersgainparameterreads6dB.
3. Performthesestepsforeachofthefrequencieslisted.
ThebottomtraceinFigure36showsthattheadjacentfiltersonaContourorMesaEQsum
toflat,unlikeallpreviousgraphicequalizerimplementations.Thisisbecauseoftheraised
cosinefiltersthatgiverisetotheIdealGraphicEQ.
50
Equalization
Figure37showsatraditionalthirdoctavegraphicEQfilter(redcurve)incomparisontoa
thirdoctaveraisedcosinefilter.Theareahighlightedgrayshowsthedifferencebetweenthe
twofiltershapes.
Figure 3-7 Comparison of Raised Cosine (blue) and Traditional Third-Octave Filters
EQ Overlays
TheconceptofEQoverlaysisanotherinnovativefeatureoftheDolbyLakeProcessorsystem.
TapthePEQ1tabatthetopofthepage.GEQ2andPEQ1aretwodifferentEQoverlays.The
whitelinerepresentsthecompositeresponseofallEQoverlays.Itnowshowsthewideband
6dBboostcreatedintheGEQ2tab.Inthenextsection,wewillseehowmultipleEQoverlays
interact.
51
3.4.3
Parametric EQ
ToaddaparametricfiltertothePEQ1overlay:
1.
TaptheparametricfilterattopoftheEQdisplay.
2.
Tapthescreennear125Hztoinsertthefilterthere.
TheparametricfiltertoolissimilartographicEQtoolexceptthefilterbandwidthis
adjustable.
3.
TapanddragtheredXuptoboostthevolumeofthisfrequency.
52
Equalization
4. Tapanddrageitheroftheverticalendlinesonthefiltertooltoincreasethebandwidthas
shown:
5. Changethecenterfrequencyoftheparametricfilterbytappinganddragginginsidethe
verticaldividerlinesoftheEQtool.
6. DragtheparametricfilterintothesamefrequencyrangeastheGEQ2filterstoseethe
resultofallthefilters(thewhitecompositelineinthepreviousfigure).
3.4.4
Add a New EQ Overlay

ToaddanewEQoverlay:
1. TapOverlayFunctions.
2. TapOverlayNew.
53
Bydefault,anewoverlayisparametricbutcanbechangedtographicbytappingthe
OverlayGEQbutton.Youcanalsochangeanoverlayfromgraphictoparametricbytapping
thissamebutton,whichwillreadOverlayPEQinthisinstance.
3.4.5
Mesa Filter
TheMesafilterisahighlyversatilefilterthatcanrapidlyadjustaloudspeakersfrequency
response.TheMesafilterprovidesafast,effectiveoptimizationtoolthattrulymatchesa
loudspeakersasymmetricresponse.TheMesafilterallowsindependentadjustmentofthe
slopesandcenterfrequenciesofthelowerandhigheredges.
ToaddaMesafiltertothenewPEQ3overlay:
1.
TaptheMesafiltertypeatthetopoftheEQinterface.
2.
TaptheEQdisplaynearthefrequencyyouwishtoinserttheMesafilter.
3. TapanddragupbetweentheredXmarksintheEQdisplaytoincreasegain.
TheMesafiltertoolhasfourdividinglines.
54
Crossovers
4. Tapbetweenthecenterandrightdividinglinesanddragtotheright.Thisspreadsthe
filterpoints,creatingavariablewidthflattop.
5.
Tapanddragtotheleftofthefarleftdividerline.
Thesameprincipleappliestothehighfrequencyedge(rightside).
6.
Tapanddragbetweenthecentertwodividerlinestochangethefrequency.
55
3.5
Crossovers
TheDolbyLakeController,whenusedinconjunctionwithContourloudspeakermodules,
allowsrealtimeadjustmentstocrossoversthroughtheXoverscreen.
Crossoverfrequencyandtypeandpostcrossoverequalizationcanbeadjusted.Inthedefault
threewayconfiguration,theContourmodulehas24dBLinkwitzRileycrossoverswith
centerfrequenciessetat250Hzand1.6kHz.TaptheXovertabtoviewthecrossover
interface.
Thelowoutputcrossoverisselectedinthisexample.Usethecrossovertooltochangethe
centerfrequency.Thelowandhighpartsofthecrossoverarecurrentlycombined.Tapthe
CrossoverSplitbuttontosplitthecrossover,anddragthecrossoverselectortoolleftto
reducethefrequenciessenttothelowoutput.
Parametricfilters(withtheexceptionoftheMesafilter)canbeaddedtofurthermodifythe
crossover.Addaparametricfilternearthecenterfrequencyofthelowoutputcrossover.
56
Crossovers
Thefullresponseoftheparametricfilterisshowninblue,buttheparametricfilteraffects
onlytheoutputitisassociatedwith.Thesolidwhitelineshowstheresultingcrossovercurve
forthelowoutput.
TaptheCrossoverSelectbuttontodisplaythecrossoverscrollbar,fromwhichyoucan
selectvariousstandardcrossovertypes.Ifcrossoversectionsarecombined,thenew
crossoverselectionisappliedtobothsidesoftheselectedcrossover.Ifcrossoversaresplit,
thecrossoverselectionappliesonlytothecurrentlyselectedoutput.
Tochangethecrossovertypetoa48dBLinkwitzRiley:
1.
Tapthe1.6kHzfilterboxtoselectthatcrossover.
2.
TapCrossoverSelect.
3.
Select48dBLinkwitz/Rileyfromthescrollbar.
4.
TapCrossoverSet.
5.
TapYesinthedialogboxtoloadthenewcrossover.
Thecrossoverinterfaceprovidesafastandeasymethodforconfiguringyourloudspeaker
system.Youcancreateyourownpresetsorbuildthembasedupondataavailablefrom
speakermanufacturers.
57
3.6
Groups
TheDolbyLakeControllerallowsgroupingofmultiplemodules.Thisuniqueconceptallows
theEQandlevelsofmultiplemodulestobechangedwithasingleadjustment.Everymodule
maybeamemberofupto28groups.
AllEQfunctionsavailableforamodulearealsoavailableforagroup,withamaximumof
fourEQoverlayspergroup.
MostLevelsfunctionsarealsoavailableforgroups,exceptthefollowing:
LimiterMaxRMSCorner
LimiterMaxRMSAttack
LimiterMaxRMSRelease
InputHeadroom
Controlofoutputlevelswherethegroupcontainsmodulesofvaryingcrossovertypes
(forexample,threeandfourwaymodulesassignedtothesamegroup)
Assigning Modules to a Group

Toassignbothmodulesofaframetoagroup:
1.
TaptheHomebuttontolocatetotheMainpage.
2.
TaptheGroupsbuttontodisplaythegroupsscrollbar.
3.
TapGroup1,andthentaptheMainpagetoaddthegrouptoyourconfiguration.
58
Dolby Lake Controller File Types
4. TaptheAssignbutton,andtaptheiconsformodulesAandBtogroupthetwoContour
loudspeakerprocessormodules.Assignedmodulesarehighlightedwithayellowborder.
5.
6.
TaptheAssignbuttonagaintoexitAssignmode.
TapGroupsEXITorHometoreturntotheMainpage.
59
3.7
Dolby Lake Controller File Types

Beforesavingthesimpleconfigurationjustcreated,itisusefultolearnaboutthefiletypes
usedtostoreandrecallsettingswithintheDolbyLakeControllersoftware.Table33
summarizesthevariousfiletypes.
Table 3-3 Dolby Lake Controller File Types
File Type
Description
ContourBaseConfigurationFile(.cbm)
Abaseconfigurationfiledefinesastarting
pointforthemodulesetup.ItcancontainEQ,
crossover,andlevelsettingsthatcanbehidden
orprotectedfromenduseradjustment.
MesaEQBaseConfigurationFile(.mbm)
ContourSingleModuleFile(.csm)
TheresultofallEQ,levels,andcrossover
settingsforthemodule,andanygroupthatit
belongsto,canbecombinedandstoredinthe
baseconfigurationfile.
Thesefilesstoreallinformationcontainedin
thebaseconfigurationfileplususersettingsfor
eachmoduleincludingthemutestates,levels
(gain,delay,andlimiters),andequalization
(filtersandEQoverlays).
MesaSingleModuleFile(.msm)
ControllerSystemConfigurationFile(.csc)
Thisfilestores/recallsallinformationcontained
withinallContourorMesasinglemodulefiles
onagivennetwork,andadditionallyincludes
genericframedataandallgroupassignments
andsettings.
Tosaveasystemconfigurationfile:
60
1.
TapHome.
2.
TapSystemStore/Recalltodisplaythescrollbar.
3.
TaptheStoreSystembuttontodisplaytheonscreenkeyboard.
Conclusion
4.
NamethesystemconfigurationExample,andtapOK.Thesystemconfigurationis
storedandthefileisdisplayedinthescrollbar.
5.
TaptheExamplefiletoselectit.ThisactivatesallrecallandstoreoptionsontheSystem
Store/Recallbuttonbar.
RecallasNewSystemclearscurrentconfigurationandloadstheselectedconfiguration.
RecallasSubSystemretainsthecurrentconfigurationandappendstheselected
configuration.RecallCompareallowsacomparisonbetweenthedatastoredonfileandthe
currentsystemconfiguration.RecallasVirtualloadsthedatafromthefileintoavirtual
offlinesystem.StoreSystemstorestheentireconfiguration.StoreSubSystemstoresonly
thedataintheselectedmodulesandgroups.
Individualmodulesettingscanalsobesavedtoafile.Thesinglemodulefilestores
everythingaboutaparticularmodule,includingitsEQoverlays,butdoesnotretainframe
data(suchasI/Oconfig)orgroupassignments.Thisfilecanberecalledintoanymoduleof
thesametype(Contour/Mesa).
Tosavethesettingsofasinglemodule:
3.8
1.
TaptheHomebutton,thentapModules.
2.
SelectthemoduleMy3Way.
3.
TapModuleStore/Recall.
4.
TapFileUtilities,thenNewFolder.
5.
EnterthefoldernameTest,andtapOK.
6.
TapFileUtilEXIT.
7.
TapNewStore,namethefileMy3Way,thentapOK.
Conclusion
Theprecedingtutorialhasintroducedmanyoftheconceptsandfeaturesthatyouwillneed
forregularuseoftheDolbyLakeController.Pleaserefertothechaptersfollowingthis
tutorialfordetailedreferenceinformationonallfeaturesandfunctionalityofthesoftware.
61
Chapter 4
HomeMenu
Reference
ThischapterprovidesdetailedinformationonthetoplevelstructureoftheDolbyLake
Controllerbuttonbar,locatedatthebottomofeverydisplaywithinthesoftware.
WhentheControllerstarts,theMainpage,Allpage,andHomebuttonbararedisplayed.
FromtheHomebuttonbar,youcannavigatetoeverypossibleuserinterfacedisplayand
functionprovidedbytheController.Table41providesadescriptionofeachbutton.
63
HomeMenu Reference
Table 4-1 Home Button Bar
Button
Description
AvailablefromeverydisplayoftheDolbyLakeController,theHomebutton
returnsyoutothetopleveldisplay.
Accessesthesubmenuthatprovidesfunctionalityforstoringandrecallingsystem
configurationfiles.Fileutilitiesarealsoprovidedforcreating,renaming,and
deletingfilesandfolders.
Accessesthesubmenuthatprovidesmodulefunctions.Thisisoneofthemost
extensivemenuswithintheController,allowingyoutoaccessmodules,super
modules,EQ,levels,I/OConfiglabeling,locking,copying,pasting,removing,
recalling,andstoring.
Accessesthesubmenuthatprovidesgroupingfunctions.Groupsareapowerful
componentoftheController,allowingyoutogroupanynumberofmodulesinto
logicalpartitions.GroupsprovideEQlevelcontrolacrossthesetofmodulesthat
areassignedtothegivengroup.
Accessesthesubmenuthatprovidessoloandmutefunctionality.Thesolo/mute
controlsallowyoutosolomodulesandgroups,andalsoprovideamodetoallow
soloingformultiplemodulesandgroups.
Accessesthesubmenuthatprovidespagefunctions.Youcanaddpages,label
pages,andmovegroupsandmodulesbetweenthepagesthatyoucreate.
Accessesthesubmenuthatprovidesuserpreferences.Thesefunctionsinclude
contexts,delayunits,designermodefunctions,keyboardshortcuts,MIDI,
graphicoptions,andshowmode.
Accessesthesubmenuthatprovidesiconcontrol.Youcanchangethesizeof
icons,andchangetothemetericonview.
Accessesthesubmenuthatprovidesnetworkfunctions.Youcanselectbetween
availablenetworksandaccessmultipleControllerfunctions.
QuitstheControllerapplication.Youarepromptedtoconfirmthisoperation.
Themenureferencechaptersthatfollowthischapterprovidedetailedreferenceforeachof
thetoplevelfunctionsontheHomebuttonbar.
64
Accessing EQ/Levels from Home
4.1
Accessing EQ/Levels from Home

WhentheDolbyLakeControllerdisplaystheHomebuttonbar,youcantapanyicononthe
currentpagetoimmediatelyaccesstheEQ/Levelsinterfaceforthegivenmodule,super
module,orgroup.Thisprovidesinstantaccesstothemoduleorgroup,withouthavingto
navigatethroughthebuttonbartogainaccesstothesemostimportantparameters.
TappingamoduleiconfromHomeisequivalenttothefollowingsequence:
1.
FromHome,tapModules.
2.
Tapamoduleicontoselectthemodule.
3.
TapEQ/Levels.
TappingagroupiconfromHomeisequivalenttothefollowingsequence:
1.
FromHome,tapGroups.
2.
Tapagroupicontoselectthegroup.
3.
TapEQ/Levels.
SincetheEQ/Levelsinterfaceformodulesandgroupsisthemostfrequentlyusedcomponent
oftheDolbyLakeController,thisisthefirstmenureferencechaptertobepresented.
65
Chapter 5
EQ/LevelsMenu
Reference
TheEQ/LevelsfunctionalityoftheDolbyLakeControllerprovidesasophisticatedand
accuraterealtimeinterfacetobothmodulesandgroupsonthenetwork.Modulesand
groupsrequiredifferentfeaturesandfunctionsforsetupandconfiguration;theyprovidethe
sameEQandlevelfunctionalitytothesoundengineer,however,forsystemoptimizationand
duringtheshow.Figure51showsageneraloverviewofhowmodulesandgroupsutilize
thesameEQ/Levelsinterfaceforaccesstotheunderlyingsignalprocessingparameters.
Figure 5-1 EQ/Levels Overview
Modules,supermodules,andgroupsusetheEQ/Levelsinterfacetopresentgain,polarity,
delay,limiter,EQ,crossover,andauxiliaryoutputparameterstothesoundengineer.When
adjustinganyoftheseparametersfromamodule,thesoundengineermakeschangestoa
singlemoduleonthenetwork.Whenadjustinganyoftheseparametersfromagroup,the
soundengineermakeschangessimultaneouslytoagroupofmodulesonthenetwork.
ThischapterprovidesamenureferenceforEQ/Levelsfunctionality,whichcanbeaccessed
frommultiplelocationswithintheController.
67
EQ/LevelsMenu Reference
5.1
EQ/Levels Overview
5.1.1
General Access
TheEQ/Levelsbuttonaccessesthefollowinginformation:
ModuleandgroupparametricEQ(PEQ)
ModuleandgroupgraphicEQ(GEQ)
Moduleandgrouplevels(gain,delays,limiters,etc.)
Modulecrossoversandhighpassfilter/lowpassfilter(HPF/LPF)(ContourTM)orHPF/LPF
only(MesaEQTM)
TheEQ/Levelsfunctionscanbeaccessedbyseveralmethodsfromthefollowingmenu
locations:
5.1.2
HomeTapamodule/groupicononce.
ModulesSelectamodule/groupicon,thentaptheEQ/Levelsbutton.
GroupsSelectamodule/groupicon,thentaptheEQ/Levelsbutton.
Solo/MuteSelectamodule/groupicon,thentaptheEQ/Levelsbutton.
I/OConfigTapasectionoftheinteractiveblockdiagram.
Restricted Access
TheDolbyLakeControllerprovidessecuritybyallowingasystemdesignertohidepartsof
thesystemorsetthemtoViewOnly.Thiscanbedonegloballyinasystem,orforindividual
modules.Thissecurityspecificationmayaffectthescreensallowedtobedisplayedwhen
accessingEQ/Levels.PleaserefertoChapter18forfurtherdetails.
5.1.3
Group Adjustments
GroupEQandlevelsareviewonlyfromamodule.ToadjustgroupEQorlevels,accessthat
groupsEQ/Levelspageviathegroupsicon.
Note: GroupsdonothaveacrossoverpageoranHPF/LPFpage,buttheGangXover/Aux
andGangHPF/LPFfunctions,whichareavailablefromtheGroupsmenu,canbe
usedtolinkthecrossoverorHPF/LPFsettingsofallmodulesinagroup.
5.1.4
Default Settings
ThefollowingexampleshowstheavailablescreensanddefaultEQoverlaysforaContour
loudspeakermoduleplacedontheMainpageoftheDolbyLakeController.
68
Levels
ThedefaultmodulecontainsaClassic3Way(CL3way)crossover.Thedefaulttabsforthis
moduleare:
LevelsDisplaysgains,delays,andlimiters
XoverDisplayscrossoversettingsforthemodule
PEQ1ParametricEQoverlay(indicatedbyyellowhighlighting)
GEQ2GraphicEQoverlay
TaptheLevelstabtotogglebetweenLevelsandEQ.
5.2
Levels
Figure52showstheLevelsinterfaceforaClassic3Waymodulewithlettersidentifyingkey
features.
H
I
J
K
Figure 5-2 Levels Interface for a Classic 3-Way Module
69
Table51providesdefinitionsforthelabelsinFigure52.
Table 5-1 Function Descriptions for the Levels Interface
Label
Function
Description
Values
Thevaluesfortheselectedattributearedisplayedhere.Formanual
entry,tapthevaluehighlightedinblue,enteravalueusingthe
onscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard),andpressOK.
Modules:Thevaluepresentedinbracketsrepresentstheoverall
parametervalue,whichincludesanygroupsthemoduleisassigned
to.Thebottomvalue(inthebluebox)representsthevalueofthe
moduleparameter.
Groups:Thegroupparameterisrepresentedinthebluebox.
LimiterIndicator
IndicatesthetotalRMSandpeaklimitinggainreductionwithan
orangebarthatmovesdownwardasgainreductionincreases.
Frame/Module/Group
Label
Modules:Displaystheselectedmodulesname.
Groups:Displaysthenameofthemoduleprovidingmetering.
Fader
Dragthefaderupordowntoadjustitslevel.Dragbelow,above,or
totheleftofthefadertoadjustbysmallerincrements.
AdditionalOutputs
Fora4,5,or6way/auxmodule,theadditionaloutputchannels
appearhere.Thenumberofoutputchannelsdependsonthemodule
type(whethermoduleis2,3,4,5,or6way/aux).
PeakLevel/PeakHold
Indicators
Indicatespeaklevelwithathingreenbar,andpeakholdwithawide
orangesegment.
RMSLevelIndicator
IndicatesRMSlevelwithawidegreenbar.
InputChannelLabel
MuteButtonand
PolarityButton
Thechannellabelisuserdefined.Thecolorandlabelofthemute
buttonidentifiesthemutestatusofthechannel:
AblueUnmutedbutton(channelunmuted)
AredMutedbutton(channelmuted)
Modules:Aredbuttonwithbluetextdenotesthechannelhasbeen
mutedbyagroupthemoduleisassignedto.Thepolaritybuttonfor
thechannelislocatedtotherightofthemutebutton.
Groups:Anorangebuttonwithbluetextdenotesthatatleastone
moduleinthatgrouphasthechannelmuted.Aredmutebuttonwith
bluetextdenotesthatthatchannelismutedonallmodulesinthe
group.Thepolaritybuttonisnotavailableatgrouplevel.
InputMixer
Modulesonly:ProvidesaccesstotheInputMixer,whichallowsyou
toenable,disable,andmixaudioinputchannels.
InputMutes
Modulesonly:Providesaccesstothephysicalinputchannelmutes,
whichwillaffectallmodulesontheselectedprocessor.
LevelsMenu
ButtonBar
ThefunctionsandsubmenusavailableontheLevelsscreensare
describedthroughoutinthissection.
Level Limits
Alllevelsaresubjecttolimitssetbythesystemdesigner.Ifyouareunabletochangeavalue
tothedesiredlevel,thismaybeduetorestrictionssetforthatchannel.
70
Levels
Hidden Output Channels

Asystemdesignermaychoosetohideanoutputchannelifitisnotbeingused.Itispossible
thatthenumberofvisibleoutputchannelswilldifferfromthenumbersuggestedbythe
moduletype.
5.2.1
Gain
TaptheGainbuttontodisplaythegainlevelsforeachchanneloftheselectedmodule/group.
Toadjustgainvalues,dragthefader(D)forlargeincrements,dragaboveorbelowthefader
forfineadjustment,ortapthevalue(A)forkeyboardentry.
5.2.2
Delay
TaptheDelaybuttontodisplaythedelaytimeforeachchanneloftheselected
module/group.Delayvaluescanbeadjustedinfourways:
Dragthefader(D)toadjustbylargeincrements
Dragaboveorbelowthefaderforfineadjustment
Dragonthemetertotheleftofthefaderforveryfineadjustment
Tapthedelayvalue(A)forkeyboardentry
Atotaldelayof2,000ms(inputplusoutput)canbeset,subjecttolevellimitssetbythe
systemdesigner.
5.2.3
LimiterMax
TaptheLimiterMaxTMbuttontoviewasubmenucontainingfunctionsrelatingtothe
MaxRMSandMaxPeaklimiters.
MaxRMS Level
TaptheMaxRMSLevelbuttontodisplaythemaximumRMSsignallevel(dB)allowedatthe
output.Anorangebarmovesdownwardfromthetopofthechannelmetertoindicatethe
limitingamount.ToadjustLimiterMaxRMSvalues,dragthefader(D)forlargeincrements,
dragaboveorbelowthefaderforfineadjustment,ortapthevalue(A)forkeyboardentry.
TheMaxRMSLevelvalueisrelativetothefactoryMaxRMSvalue(dBu).Whiledraggingthe
fader,thetotalvalueisdisplayedinthestatusbarasdBurms,dBVrmsandVrms.
MaxRMS Corner
MaxRMSCornerappliestomodulesonly;thisfunctionisinactiveifagroupisselected.
71
TheLimiterCornersoftenstheMaxRMSlimitingbycreatingacurvethatgradually
introduceslimiting.Thisfunctionissimilartoanaudiocompressorskneefunction.For
example,ifMaxRMSLevelequals6dBandLimiterCornerequals4dB,limitingbegins
graduallywhentheMaxRMSlevelreaches10dBandincreasesuntilmaximumlimiting
occursat6dB.
TaptheMaxRMSCornerbuttontodisplaythevalue(dB)foreachchanneloftheselected
module.ToadjustLimiterCornervalues,dragthefader(D)ortapthevalue(A)forkeyboard
entry.
MaxRMS Attack and MaxRMS Release

MaxRMSAttackandReleaseappliestomodulesonly;thesefunctionsareinactiveifagroup
isselected.
TheAttackandReleasetimes(alsoreferredtoasTimeConstants)determinethetimein
millisecondsthattheMaxRMSLimitertakestofullyengageanddisengageoncetheMaxRMS
Cornerlevelhasbeenreached.
TaptheMaxRMSAttackorMaxRMSReleasebuttontodisplaythevalue(ms)foreach
channeloftheselectedmodule.Toadjustthevalue,dragthefader(D)ortapthevalue(A)
forkeyboardentry.
Auto Time Constant

TheMaxRMSAttackandReleasevaluesmaybesetmanuallybytheuser,ormaybe
calculatedautomatically.Automaticcalculationisdeterminedbythecrossoverfrequencyof
thechannelshighpassfilter,ifapplicable.Otherwise,itisfixedat160ms.
ThecAutobuttonisdisplayedunderneaththesliderwhenviewingeithertheAttackor
Releasesettings.WhenthecAutobuttonisenabled(Orange),thesliderisdisabledandthe
AttackorReleasevaluesarecalculatedautomatically.
MaxPeak Level
TaptheMaxPeakLevelbuttontodisplaythemaximumpeaksignallevel(dB)allowedatthe
output.
72
Levels
TheMaxPeakLimiterprocessisdisabledwhenthetotalMaxPeaklevel(includingGroupand
Factorysettings)is25dBuorgreater.
Anorangebarmovesdownwardfromthetopofthechannelmetertoindicatethelimiting
amount.ToadjustLimiterMaxPeakvalues,dragthefader(D)forlargeincrements,drag
aboveorbelowthefaderforfineadjustment,ortapthevalue(A)forkeyboardentry.
TheMaxPeakLevelvalueisrelativetothefactoryMaxPeakvalue(dBupk).Whiledragging
thefader,thetotalvalueisdisplayedinthestatusbarasdBupk,dBVpk,andVpk.
5.2.4
Input Headroom
ThisfunctionisavailableonlyforModulesontheContourPro26andMesaQuadEQTM.Input
HeadroomisconfiguredviaI/OConfig>InputConfigurationfortheDolbyLakeProcessor,
andisnotavailableforgroups.
Toadjustinputheadroomvalues,dragthefader(D)forlargeincrements,dragaboveor
belowthefaderforfineadjustment,ortapthevalue(A)forkeyboardentry.
5.2.5
Enable Mute
Thisbuttonlocksandunlocksthemutebuttonsandisactivebydefault(thatis,mutingor
unmutingisallowed).Whenthebuttonisactive(orange),channelmutingviatheController
isenabled.Whenthebuttonisinactive(blue),channelmutingisdisabled.
5.2.6
Enable Polarity
Thisbuttonlocksorunlocksthepolaritybuttonsandisinactivebydefault(polaritybuttons
locked).Whenthebuttonisactive(orange),thepolaritycanbechanged.Whenthebuttonis
inactive(blue),thepolaritycannotbechanged.
Note: Ifasystemdesignerhaslockedoutpolaritychangesononeormoreoutputs,the
polaritybuttonfortheoutputswillnotbedisplayedinUsermode.
5.2.7
Label Channel
Thisfunctionappliestomodulesonlyandisinactiveifagroupisselected.Channellabelsfor
groupsarederivedfromthemodulethathasbeenassignedformeteringpurposesasjust
described.
Thechannellabelisauserdefinedvaluethatappearsonthemutebuttonatthebottomof
eachchannel,themoduleI/OConfigpage,andonanyauxiliaryoutputEQtabs.
Tolabelachannel:
1.
AccessamoduleLevelspagethroughamoduleicon.
73
5.2.8
2.
TapLabelChannel,thentaptherequiredchannellabel/mutebutton.
3.
Enterthechannellabelusingtheonscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard).
4.
TapLabelChanneltoexitthismode.
Meter Options
TaptheMeterOptionsbuttontoviewasubmenucontainingfunctionsrelatingtoalternate
meterviewsandsystemdesignerfeatures.
Input +4dBu Reference

TaptheInput+4dBuReferencebuttontoviewthephysicalinputsignalmeterrelativeto
+4dBu.TapthebuttonagaintoreturntothedefaultDigitalClip(DClip)view.
TheDClipmeteringmodeshowstheaudiolevelpriortoanygainadjustment(input
headroom,ordigitalgainoffset),andindicateswhentheA/Dconverterswillclip.The+4dBu
meteringmodeshowstheaudiolevelafteranygainadjustment,andisusefulforcomparing
levelsofdifferentinputsignalspriortoprocessing.
Thisisaglobalfunction;allphysicalinputmetersthroughoutthesystemdisplaythe
referenceselectedhere.
Pre Limiter
TapthePreLimiterbuttontoviewtheprelimiteroutputsignals.Tapagaintoreturntopost
limitermode.Thisisaglobalfunction;andallmetersthroughoutthesystemdisplaythe
Note: Thelimiterstatusisidentifiedonthebottomrightofeachoutputmeterabovethe
channellabel/mutebutton.
AmpClip Reference
TaptheAmpClipReferencebuttontoviewoutputsignalswithrespecttotheAmpClip
referencelevel.Tapagaintoreturntothenormalview,whichisrelativetothefactory
MaxRMSlevelasdefinedusingDesignerMode.
WhenAmpClipReferenceisselected,theAmpCliplevelisusedasthereferenceforthe
0dBlevelonthemeter.Withcorrectsettings,theoutputmeterwillidentifytheonsetof
clipping.
AmpClipReferenceisaglobalfunction;allmetersthroughoutthesystemdisplaythe
74
Levels
Assign Meters
TheAssignMetersfunctionisactiveonlywhenagroupLevelspageisaccessedviaagroup
icon.Formeteringpurposes,amodulemaybeassignedtoagroup.Thisprovidesan
overviewoftheinput/outputsignalsforthatgroup.
Whenagroupiscreated,thefirstmoduletobeassignedtothatgroupisassignedtometering
automatically.
Toassignamoduletoagroupformeteringpurposes:
1.
AccessagroupLevelspagethroughagroupicon.
2.
TapMeterOptions,thentapAssignMeters.
3.
Themodulescrollbarappearsdisplayingmodulesassignedtotheselectedgroup.
4.
Onthescrollbar,tapthemoduleyouwishtouseformetering.
5.
TapAssignMetersagain,thenMeterOptionsExittoexitthismode.
AmpClip
AmpClipprovidesaparameterforscalingtheoutputmeteringoftheDolbyLakeProcessor
tocalibratetheclippingpointtoagivenamplifierssensitivity.Thisvalue(theAmpClip
referencelevel)issetindBuandisasumofthefactoryAmpClipvalue(dBu)andtheuser
AmpClipvalue(dB).
InbothAmpClipReferenceandMaxRMSReferencemeteringmodes,theoutputpeakmeters
willturnredattheAmpClipreferenceleveltoindicatepossibleoutputclippingasshownin
thisfigure.
Peak Meter Bar

turns red at the
AmpClip reference
level.
75
Level Limits
ThisfunctionbuttonisvisibleonlyinDesignerMode,andisusedforsettingminimumand
maximumvaluesforallLevelsattributesdescribedinthischapter.
Adjust Factory
ThisfunctionbuttonisvisibleonlyinDesignerModeandisusedfordefiningdefaultlevel
settingsandlevellimitsforallattributesdescribedinthischapter.
TheControllerhastwotypesofinputEQ:MesaParametricEQTMandIdealGraphicEQTM.
AdditionalparametricoutputEQisavailableontheXoverpageandAuxtabs.Thissection
dealswithinputEQ.
GroupsandmodulescanhavemultiplelayersofEQ,calledEQoverlays.Eachmodulecan
haveuptoeightEQoverlays,andeachgroupcanhaveuptofourEQoverlays.Amodule
canhaveupto256inputEQfiltersdistributedamongsttheseEQoverlays.Althoughthis
maysoundextreme,thelargenumberoffiltersisnecessaryinordertoallowfor
sophisticatedgroupingofIdealGraphicEQoverlays.
AmodulesoverallinputEQresponseiscalculatedbycombiningitsinputEQoverlayswith
thoseofallgroupstowhichthatmoduleisassigned.TheresultingcompositeEQcurveis
indicatedbyawhitelinethatisdisplayedonalloverlays.
Figure 5-3 Sample Composite EQ Curve
5.2.9
Default Overlays
ModulesandgroupsbothusethesameEQoverlaysandEQfunctions.Ifamoduleis
assignedtoagroup,thegroupEQoverlayscanbeviewedfromthemodulebutcannotbe
updated.ChangestogroupEQareperformedbyaccessingthegroupscontrols.
Bydefault,amodulehasparametric(PEQ1)andgraphicEQ(GEQ2);agrouphasasingle
parametricEQ(PEQ1).TheseEQoverlayscannotberemoved.
76
Levels
5.2.10
Hidden Overlays
Asystemdesignercan:
Hidespecificoverlays
Hidealloverlaysthroughoutthesystem
SetspecificoverlaystoViewOnly
SetalloverlaystoViewOnly
ItisimportanttobeawarethattheremaybeanoverlaypresentthataffectstheoverallEQ
curve,butisnotaccessiblebytheenduser.
5.2.11
Parametric EQ Screen
Figure54showsaparametricEQ(PEQ1)screen,includinglettersmarkingitskeyfunctions.
G
B
Figure 5-4 Mesa Parametric EQ Screen
77
Table52definesthefunctionslabeledinFigure54.
Note: Whenadefaultmoduleconfigurationisloaded,thePEQoverlaycontainsasetof
defaultfiltersforuseonthefrontpaneloftheDolbyLakeProcessor.
Table 5-2 Function Descriptions for Mesa Parametric EQ Screen
Label
A
Function
FrequencyLock
andA/BButtons
Description
FrequencyLock:
Blue=filterfrequencyunlocked
Orange=filterfrequencylocked
Whenlocked,thefrequencyoftheselectedfiltercanonlybeadjustedusingthe
EQTool(J).
A/B:Tapthisbuttontocreateabypassedcopyoftheselectedoverlay.EQ
adjustmentscanthenbemadeandquicklycompared.
FilterBox
Displaysthefrequency,bandwidth,andgainvaluesofeachfilter.
Tapafilterboxtoselectaparticularfilter.
DoubletapthefilterboxtoswitchtoFineAdjustmentmode.
Dragthefilterboxdowntobypassthefilter.
Dragthefilterboxuptoinsert.
Dragthefilterboxoffthetopofthescreentodelete.
78
LowShelfFilter
Boost/cutlowfrequencies.Unliketraditionallyimplementedshelffilters,the
MesaEQshelffiltercanbeadjustedfromveryshallowtoextremelysteepfilter
slopes.
ParametricFilter
Boost/cutaspecifiedfrequencyband,fromonetenthofanoctavetomultiple
octavesofbandwidth.
MesaFilter
TheuniqueMesafiltercontainstwofilterpointsthatcanbeadjustedoneither
sidetocreateasteeppeakoragentleslopewithavariablewidthflattop
frequencyresponse.
HighShelfFilter
Boost/cuthighfrequencies.Unliketraditionallyimplementedshelffilters,the
MesaEQshelffiltercanbeadjustedfromveryshallowtoextremelysteepfilter
slopes.
ModuleIcon
Displaysthecurrentlyselectedmoduleandstatusinformation.
FilterShapeEQ
Curve
Theselectedfilterishighlightedinlightblue.TheoverallEQcurveisidentified
byawhiteline.
EQTool
(LeftSide)
Adjuststhefilterbandwidthforparametric,Mesa,andhighshelffiltersby
draggingleftorright.
EQTool(Center)
Changesthefrequencyoftheselectedfilterbydraggingleftorright.
Levels
Label
Function
Description
EQTool
(FlatTop)
Dragleftorrightatthispointoneithersideof(J)toadjusttheflattopwidthof
theMesafilter.
EQTool
(RightSide)
Adjuststhefilteroctavewidthforparametric,Mesa,andlowshelffiltersby
draggingleftorright.
EQMenuButton
Bar
ThefunctionsandsubmenusavailableontheEQoverlaysaredescribedinthe
followingsections.
ToaddanEQfiltertoaparametricEQoverlay:
1.
TaptherequiredparametricEQshape(C,D,E,orF).
2.
TapagainanywhereontheEQcurve(H).
3.
Boost/cutthefrequencygainbydraggingthefilterpointupordown.
Note: Ifamousewithawheelisattached,youcanusethewheeltoadjustthegain.
4.
Adjustthefrequencybydraggingthefilterpointleftorright.
IfFrequencyLock(A)isactive(orange),youcannotadjustthefrequencybydraggingthe
filterpointinthemainEQoverlaydisplay.DeactivateFrequencyLock(A)orusetheEQTool
(J)toadjustfrequency.
5.2.12
Graphic EQ Screen
TheDolbyLakeControllerprovidesa28bandgraphicEQ(GEQ)overlay.Figure55shows
theGraphicEQ(GEQ2)screenalongwithlettersmarkingitskeyfunctions.
79
Figure 5-5 Ideal Graphic EQ Screen
80
Levels
Table 5-3 Function Descriptions for Graphic EQ Screen
Label
Function
FrequencyLockandA/BButtons
Description
FrequencyLock:
Orange=filterfrequencylocked
Whenlocked,thefrequencyoftheselectedfiltercan
onlybeadjustedusingtheEQTool(E).
A/B:Tapthisbuttontocreateabypassedcopyofthe
selectedoverlay.Adjustmentscanthenbemadeto
oneoverlayandinstantlycomparedtotheoriginal
overlay.
FilterBox
Displaysthefrequency,bandwidth,andgainvalues
ofeachfilter.
Tapafilterboxtoselectaparticularfilter.
DoubletapthefilterboxtoswitchtoFine
Adjustmentmode.
Dragthefilterboxdowntobypassthefilter.
Dragthefilterboxuptoinsert.
ModuleIcon
Describesthecurrentlyselectedmoduleandstatus.
EQCurve
AwhitelineidentifiestheoverallEQcurve.
EQTool
DragtheEQToolleftorrighttoselectthefrequency
tochange.
ToaddgraphicEQ:
1.
SelectthefilterpointtoadjustusingtheEQTool(E).
2.
Dragthefilterpointupordowntoincreaseordecreasegain.
IfFrequencyLock(A)isinactive,youcanalsotapafilterpointtoselectitanddragupor
downtoadjustthegain.
5.2.13
Input EQ Menu Reference

ThebuttonbarpresentedwhileviewingtheInputEQdisplayprovidesanumberof
applicablefunctionsforadjustingEQandconfiguringEQoverlays.
81
OverlayFunctions,immediatelytotherightoftheEQ/Levelsbutton,providesasubmenu
withthefollowingitems:
Overlay Properties/EQ Preferences

InUserMode,theonlyfunctionactiveundertheOverlayPropertiesmenuisEQ
Preferences,whichprovidesasubmenucontainingfunctionsthatcontroltheviewoftheEQ
scaleandscreens.
SeparatesettingscanbestoredforcrossoverEQandinput/auxiliaryEQ.Therefore,most
changesmadeusingOverlayProperties/EQPreferencesaffectonlytheinputandauxiliary
outputEQscales.
Table 5-4 EQ Preference Descriptions
Function
Description
NoScale
RemovesthescalelinesonallEQ/CrossoverandAuxiliaryscreens.
ResetScale
ResetstheEQscaletothedefaultsettingof15dB.
ZoomIn
ZoomstheEQscaleinby3dBincrements(forexample,ifscaleis15dB,tapping
ZoomInwillchangethescaleto12dB).
ZoomOut
ZoomstheEQscaleoutby3dBincrements(forexample,ifscaleis15dB,tapping
ZoomOutwillchangethescaleto18dB).
EQPrefExit
Returnsthepreviousmenulevel.
FullResponse
AvailableonlyforCrossoverandAuxiliaryOutputscreens.Whenactive(orange),the
overallEQcurveisshown,takingintoaccountallcrossovers,highpassandlowpass
filters,outputEQandinputEQforthemoduleandanygroupsitisassignedto.Not
applicableforinputEQscreens(PEQ/GEQ).
Up
Movesthezerolineupin3dBincrements.
Down
Movesthezerolinedownin3dBincrements.
Overlay Hide/Overlay View Only

ThesefunctionsareactiveonlywheninDesignerMode.PleaserefertoChapter18.
82
Levels
Overlay GEQ/Overlay PEQ

Thisbuttonslabelchangesdependingonthecurrentlyselectedoverlaytype.
IfaparametricEQ(PEQ)overlayisselected,thebuttonreadsOverlayGEQ.Tappingit
flattensallPEQandconvertstheoverlaytoagraphicEQ.
IfagraphicEQ(GEQ)overlayisselected,thebuttonreadsOverlayPEQ.Tappingitflattens
allGEQandconvertstheoverlaytoaparametricEQ.
Overlay Delete
OverlayDeleteisinactiveforthedefaultoverlays.Anoverlaycreatedbyausermaybe
deletedbyselectingtheoverlayandtappingOverlayDelete.Iftheoverlaycontainsfilters,a
warningmessagewillbedisplayed.
Overlay Copy
TapOverlayCopytocopytheselectedoverlay.Thisfunctionisusedinconjunctionwith
OverlayPasteOver.
Overlay New
TapOverlayNewtocreateanewPEQoverlay.ThiscanbechangedtoaGEQoverlay(refer
tothepreviousOverlayGEQ/PEQsection).
Note: Eachmodulecanhaveuptoeightoverlays;groupscanhaveuptofour.
Overlay Paste Over

AfterusingtheOverlayCopyaction,tappingOverlayPasteOverpastesthecopieddatainto
theselectedoverlay,overwritingitspreviouscontent.
Overlay Label
OverlayLabelisauserdefinedvaluethatappearsontheoverlaytabatthetopofthescreen.
Tolabelanoverlay:
1.
Tapthedesiredoverlaytab.
2.
TapOverlayLabel.
3.
Enterthelabelnameusingtheonscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard).
4.
TapOK.
83
5.2.14
Overlay Bypass/Overlay Insert/Overlay Compare

Thisbuttonslabelchangesdependingonwhethertheselectedoverlayiscurrentlyactiveor
bypassed.
Iftheoverlayisactive,thebuttonreadsOverlayBypass.Tapthebuttontobypassthe
overlay.Abypassedoverlayisdisplayedatthebottomofthescreen,justabovethebutton
bar.
Iftheoverlayisbypassed,thebuttonreadsOverlayInsert.Tapthebuttontoinsertthe
overlay.Anactiveoverlayisdisplayedatthetopofthescreen.
Ifabypassedoverlayisplaceddirectlyunderneathanactiveoverlay,thebuttonreads
OverlayCompare.
Note: Anoverlaycanalsobebypassedbydraggingtheoverlaytabdowntothebottomor
insertedbydragginguptothetopofthescreen.InComparemode,draggingeither
overlayupordownswapstheactive/bypassedoverlay.
A/B Overlay Compare

Inadditiontothebypassfeature,youcancomparetwooverlayswithinamoduleorgroup.
ThetwowaystocreateanA/Bcomparisonaredescribedinthefollowingsections.
Using the A/B Button

TheA/Bbuttonatthetopleftofthescreencreatesabypassedcopyoftheselectedoverlay.
Changescanthenbemadetooneoftheoverlays,andcomparedbytappingOverlay
Compare.
Comparing Existing Overlays

FollowthisprocesstocomparetwoexistingEQoverlays:
1.
TapoverlayAtoselectit.
2.
TapOverlayBypass.
OverlayAisnowatthebottomofthescreen.
3.
TapanddragoverlayAleftorrightalongthebottomofthescreenuntilitisaligned
directlyunderneaththeEQoverlayyouwishtocompare.
4.
TapOverlayCompare.
Eachtimethebuttonistapped,thetwooverlaysswitchpositionsthetopoverlayisactive
andthebottomisbypassed.
84
Levels
5.2.15
Overlay Flat
TapOverlayFlattoflattenanddeleteallfiltersfromtheselectedoverlay.Thisfunctionis
inactiveiftheselectedoverlaydoesnotcontainanyfilters.
5.2.16
Filter Bypass/Filter Insert

Thebuttonlabelchangesdependingonwhethertheselectedfilterisactiveorbypassed.The
buttonreads:
FilterBypassIfthefilterisactive;tapittobypassthefilter.
FilterInsertIfthefilterisbypassed;tapittoinsertthefilter.
Thefiltereditboxofabypassedfilterispositionedslightlylowerthananactivefiltersedit
boxanddoesnothaveayellowborderwhenselected.
Note: Afiltercanbebypassed/insertedbydraggingthefiltereditboxdown(bypass)orup
(insert).
5.2.17
Filter Flat
TapFilterFlattoflattentheselectedfilter.Thissetsthefiltergaintozero,butfrequencyand
bandwidthremainunchanged.
FilterFlatisinactiveiftheselectedoverlaydoesnotcontainanyfilters.
5.2.18
Filter Delete
TapFilterDeletetoremovetheselectedfilterfromtheoverlay.
Note: APEQfiltercanbedeletedbydraggingthefilterboxupwardoffthescreen.
FilterDeleteisinactiveiftheselectedoverlayisa:
GraphicEQ,becauseitsfilterpointsarefixedandcannotbedeleted
ParametricEQoverlaywithoutanyfilters
85
5.2.19
Filter Edit
Thisfunctionallowsmanualentryofgain(dB),frequency(Hz),andbandwidth(octave)for
theselectedfilter.IfaPEQoverlayisselectedandtheFilterEditbuttonispressed,the
parametricshapesarereplacedwiththevaluesoftheselectedfilter.
Toadjustfilterparametersusingfilteredit:
1.
Taptheoverlaytoselectit.
2.
Tapthefilterbox,orusetheEQTooltoselectthefilter.
3.
TapFilterEdit.
4.
Tapthegain,frequency,orbandwidthvalue(highlightedinblue).
5.
Enterthevaluerequiredusingtheonscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard),andtap
OK.TheFilterEditfunctionisinactiveiftheselectedoverlaydoesnotcontainanyfilters.
Note: HighfrequencyvaluescanbeenteredusingktodenotekHz,insteadofHz(for
example,12kinsteadof12,000Hz).
5.2.20
Analyzer Bridge/Analyzer Unavailable

TheDolbyLakeAnalyzerBridgeprovidesaninterfacebetweentheDolbyLakeController
andcertainaudioanalyzer.
TheDolbyLakeAnalyzerBridgeprovidesspectrum,spectrograph,andtransferfunction
displaysontheXover,Aux,andEQoverlays.
IfbothanapprovedanalyzerandtheDolbyLakeAnalyzerBridgeareidentifiedonthe
network,thisbuttonwillreadAnalyzerBridge.IfeitheryouranalyzerortheAnalyzer
Bridgeisnotpresentonthenetwork,thebuttonwillreadAnalyzerUnavailable.
5.2.21
High-Precision Filter Adjustments

Doubletapthefilterparametersboxsoitturnsfromitsnormalappearancetoagrayoutline
andgraytext.ThisswitchesfromNormalAdjustmenttoFineAdjustmentmode.Toreturnto
NormalAdjustmentmode,tapthefilterboxonce.FineAdjustmentmodeisalso
implementedgloballywhenShowmodeisselected.
86
Crossovers and HPF/LPF
5.3

TheXoverandHPF/LPFscreensdisplaythecrossoverand/orHPF/LPFinformationforthe
selectedmodule,dependingonthemoduletype.TheXoverandHPF/LPFscreensdonot
applytogroups.
ToviewtheXoverscreen:
1.
AccessEQ/Levels,andtaptheEQpagetabatthetopleftofthescreen.
2.
TaptheXoverorHPF/LPFtabnexttoLevelsatthetopofscreen.
Figure56showstheXoverscreenalongwithlettersmarkingitskeyfunctions.
D
F
Figure 5-6 Xover Screen
87
Table 5-5 Function Descriptions for Xover EQ Screen
Label
Function
Description
FrequencyLockand
HPFEnableButtons
Relevanttoparametricfiltersonly(B,C,andD).
FrequencyLock:
Orange=filterfrequencylocked(whenlocked,frequencycanbeadjustedonly
withtheEQTool)
HPFEnable:
Activatesordeactivatesthehighpassfilter(HPF)forthemodule.
Blue=HPFdisabled
Orange=HPFenabled
LowShelfFilter
(Xover/Aux)
Usedtoboost/cutlowfrequencies.
ParametricFilter
(Xover/Aux)
Usedtoboost/cutaspecifiedfrequencyband.
HighShelfFilter
(Xover/Aux)
Usedtoboost/cuthighfrequencies.
FilterEditBox
DisplaysthecrossoverorHPF/LPFcenterfrequencyandtype,dependingon
thefilterselected.
Module/FrameLabels
andSelectedOutput
ChannelLabel
Thisareaofthescreendisplaystheframeandmodulelabelsandtheselected
outputlabel.
LowOutputFrequency
Range(Selected)
Thelowestfrequencyoutputofthecrossover.Thisoutputchannelisthe
currentlyselectedcrossoverfilter,identifiedbylightgreenshading.Asolid
whitelineidentifiesthefrequencyresponseofthisoutputchannel.
MidOutputFrequency
Range
Thepassbandcrossoverthatiscurrentlynotselected,asidentifiedbydark
greenshading.
HighOutput
FrequencyRange
Thehighestfrequencyoutputofthecrossover.
Foratwowaymodule,theXoverscreendisplaystwocrossoverchannels
insteadofthree.AnadditionalEQtablabeledAuxisavailableontwoway
modules.
Crossover/FilterPoint
AnXmarksthefrequencyatwhichtheoutputfilterscrossover.Parametric
filterpointsarealsoidentifiedbyared(selected)oryellow(notselected)X.
Onlyfilterpoints/filterboxesfortheselectedoutputaredisplayed.
CrossoverSelector
Thisisusedtochangethecrossoverfrequencyandtoselectthesideofthe
crossoveryouwishtoaffect.Lightgreendenotestheselectedhalf,anddark
greenisnotselected.WhenaPEQfilterisselected,thecrossoverselector
changestothebluefiltershapetool.
CrossoverMenu
ButtonBar
ThefunctionsandsubmenusavailableontheXoverpagearedescribedinthe
followingsections.
5.3.1
Using the Highpass Filter (HPF Enable)

Thehighpassfilterfiltersallfrequenciesbelowthespecifiedfrequency.InputHPFandLow
OutputHPFareavailable.InputHPFaffectsalloutputchannels;LowOutputHPFaffects
onlythelowestoutputofthemodule.Thesetwodifferentmodesofoperationareprovided
88
inordertosatisfytherequirementsofvariousloudspeakermanufacturersrequiredsignal
processingconfigurations.
TosettheLowOutputHPF:
1.
TapHPFEnable,thentapHPFSelect.
2.
Selectafilterfromthescrollbar(24dBorless).
3.
TapHPFSet,thenYestothewarningmessage.
TochangetheHPFtoaffectalloutputs(InputHPF):
1.
TapCrossoverFunctions,thenHPFFunctions.
2.
TapInputHPF.
Whileinthismode,movetheHPFcenterfrequency,andnotehowitaffectsalloutputsofthe
module.
Note: ThecenterfrequencyoftheHPFcanbesettoaminimumof10HzusingtheFilter
Editfunction.
5.3.2
Using PEQ Filters on the Xover Screen

TheXoverscreenprovideslowshelf(B),parametric(C),andhighshelf(D)filterstoshape
theaudiofromeachoutputasrequired.WhenusedontheXoverscreen,theparametricEQ
filtersaffectonlytheselectedoutput.
Note: OnlythePEQfilterpointsandfilterboxesoftheselectedoutputaredisplayed.To
selectanoutput,taptherelevantgreenfilterboxandtogglebetweenoutputsusing
thecrossovertool.Theselectedoutputnameisdisplayedinredtextatthetopright
oftheXoverscreen.
89
Thefollowingscreenshowsaparametricfilterusedtoshapethesoundfromoutput1,the
firstoutputofmoduleA,whichisthecurrentlyselectedmodule.Letterlabeledpointsonthe
screenareuseinthesubsequentinstructions.
Althoughthisparametricfiltercrossestherangeusedbyalloutputs,itaffectsonlytherange
oftheselectedoutput.Thecurvedwhitelineidentifiestheeffecttheparametricfilterhason
output1.
ToaddparametricEQtoanoutput:
90
1.
Taptherequiredcrossoverfilterbox(F)toselectthecrossover.
2.
Usethecrossoverselectortoselecttherequiredoutputofthecrossover(lightgreen
equalsselected).
3.
TapanEQfilter(B,C,orD),andtapagaininmiddleofscreen.
4.
Boost/cutthefrequencygainbydraggingthefilterpoint(G)up/down.
5.
Adjustthefrequencybydraggingthefilterpoint(G)leftorright.IfFrequencyLock(A)
isactive(orange),youcannotchangethefrequencybydraggingthefilterpoint.Either
deactivateFrequencyLockorusetheEQTool(I)tochangethefrequency.
6.
Adjustthebandwidthbydraggingtotheleftorrightoftheshapetool(J).
5.3.3
Linear Phase Crossovers

Thelinearphasecrossovermodulesprovidesteepcrossoverswithoutphasedistortion.The
followingexampleshowstheXoverscreenforaLinearPhaseBrickWall4Waymodule
(LP4way).
Whilemostofthebuttonbarfunctionsarethesame,someXovermenuoptionsand
functionsaredifferentforlinearphasemodules.Thedifferencesareidentifiedinthesections
thatfollow.
5.3.4
Crossover Functions
CrossoverFunctionsprovidesasubmenucontainingthefollowingfunctions:
HPF/LPF Functions
HPF/LPFFuncExitExitsthismenuandreturnstotheCrossoverFunctionsmenu.
InputHPF(Contouronly)SetstheoverallmoduleHPFtoaffectalloutputchannelsfor
themodule(dependingonthefrequencyoftheHPFandoutputs).
91
LowOutputHPF(Contouronly)TheLowOutputHPFsettingaffectsonlythelowest
outputchanneloftheselectedmodule.
HPFEnableEnables/disablestheHPFfortheselectedmodule.
LPFEnableEnables/disablestheLPFonthehighestoutputchannelfortheselected
module.
Note: InputHPFandLowOutputHPFbuttonsaredisabledfortheLinearPhaseBrick
Wall4Waymodule.TheLP4wayHPFisfixedtoInputHPF.Allothermoduletypes,
includingLinearPhase2and3Waymodules,providetheHPFswitchingoption.
Crossover Hide
AvailableonlyinDesignerMode.Whenenabled(orange),thecrossoverpagewillbehidden
whenthemoduleislocked,orafterexitingfromDesignerMode.
Crossover View Only

AvailableonlyinDesignerMode.Whenenabled(orange),thecrossoverpagewillbesetas
viewonlywhenthemoduleislocked,orafterexitingfromDesignerMode.
EQ Preferences
ThisprovidesasubmenucontainingoptionsregardingtheviewoftheEQscale.
Crossover Copy
CopiesallcrossoverandEQsettingsfromtheselectedXoverorHPF/LPFpage.
Crossover Paste
ActiveonlywhenacrossoverorHPF/LPFpagehaspreviouslybeencopiedandthecurrent
moduleisthesametype.
Acrossovercanonlybepastedtoamoduleofthesamenumberofchannelsandthesame
type.Forexample,aClassic3WaycrossovercanbepastedintoanotherClassic3Way
crossover,theHPF/LPFofaMesaEQmodulecanonlybepastedontoanotherMesaEQ
HPF/LPFpage,andaClassic4WaycrossovercannotbepastedintoaLinearPhaseBrick
Wall4Way.
Note: Thecrossovercopyandpastefunctionstransferonlythefiltersettingsforthe
crossoverandHPF/LPF(Contour)orHPF/LPFonly(MesaEQ).Alllevelsandinput
EQ(PEQ/GEQ)willnotbeaffectedonthedestinationmodule.
92
5.3.5
Crossover Split/Crossover Combine/Alignment Delay

Thisbuttonslabeldependsonthestateofthecurrentlyselectedcrossoverandthemodule
type(ClassicequalsSplit/Combine;linearphaseequalsAlignmentDelay).
Crossover Split
ThelabelreadsCrossoverSplitwhenafilterboxisselectedforaClassiccrossoverthatis
currentlycombined.ThisfunctionseparatestheHPFandLPFofaClassiccrossover,enabling
independentadjustmentofthecrossoverfrequencyandtype.
Tosplitacrossover,tapacrossoverfilterbox,thentapCrossoverSplit.
Note: CrossoverSplitisnotapplicableforlinearphasecrossovers.
Crossover Combine
ThelabelreadsCrossoverCombinewhenafilterboxisselectedforaClassiccrossoverthat
iscurrentlysplit.ThisfunctionjoinstheseparatedClassiccrossoverfilterstogetherbasedon
thefrequencyandtypeofthecurrentlyselectedfilter.
Tocombineapreviouslysplitcrossover,selectthecrossoverfilterboxyouwishtouse,then
tapCrossoverCombine.
Note: CrossoverCombineisnotapplicableforlinearphasecrossovers.
Alignment Delay
Alinearphaseresponserequiresconsiderableprocessing;theAlignmentDelayfunction
allowsalinearphaseresponsetobeusedindifferentcircumstancesdependingonthe
maximumdelaythatcanbepermittedinconjunctionwiththecrossoverslope.
Steeperlowfrequencylinearphasecrossoverscanbecalculatedwithalongeralignment
delay.Ifasteeplowfrequencylinearphasecrossoverisnotrequired,ashorteralignment
delaycanbeutilized.
ThelabelonthisbuttonreadsAlignmentDelayforlinearphasecrossovers,andisnot
applicableforClassiccrossoversorothermoduletypes.
93
TochangeAlignmentDelaysettings:
1.
TapAlignmentDelay.Thecurrentlyselecteddelaysettingishighlightedinorange.
2.
Taptherequireddelaysetting.Ashorteralignmentdelayequalsashallowerlinearphase
crossovertransitionbandslope.Alongeralignmentdelayequalsasteeperlinearphase
crossovertransitionbandslope.
LP2wayandLP3waymodulesusedifferentAlignmentDelaysettingstotheLP4way.
Table56showsthehighestandlowestfrequenciesavailablefortheLinearPhaseBrickWall
2Way/3Way,alongwithassociatedrolloffperoctaveatthesesettings.
Table 5-6 Linear Phase Brick Wall 2-Way/3-Way
Alignment
Delay
Lowest
Frequency
dB/Octave
Highest
Frequency
dB/Octave
1.25ms
500Hz
13.61
12kHz
93.37
2.50ms
250Hz
11.04
12kHz
93.37
5ms
125Hz
11.01
12kHz
93.37
10ms
62.5Hz
11.03
12kHz
93.37
20ms
32.5Hz
10.84
12kHz
93.37
40ms
32.4Hz
14.47
12kHz
93.37
Table57showsthehighestandlowestfrequenciesavailablefortheLinearPhase24
dB/octave2Way/3Way.
Table 5-7 Linear Phase 24 dB/Octave 2-Way/3-Way
Alignment
Delay
Lowest
Frequency
Highest
Frequency
1.25ms
1.03kHz
6.022kHz
2.50ms
515Hz
6.022kHz
5ms
258Hz
6.022kHz
10ms
129Hz
6.022kHz
20ms
32.5Hz
6.022kHz
40ms
31.6Hz
6.022kHz
Table58showsthehighestandlowestfrequenciesavailablefortheLinearPhase48
dB/octave2Way/3Way.
94
Table 5-8 Linear Phase 48 dB/Octave 2-Way/3-Way
Alignment Delay
Lowest Frequency
Highest Frequency
1.25ms
1.03kHz
8.501kHz
2.5ms
515Hz
8.501kHz
5ms
258Hz
8.501kHz
10ms
129Hz
8.501kHz
20ms
32.5Hz
8.501kHz
40ms
31.6Hz
8.501kHz
Table59showsthehighestandlowestfrequenciesavailablefortheLinearPhaseBrickWall
4Way(LP4way),alongwithassociatedrolloffperoctaveatthesesettings.
Table 5-9 Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way
Alignment
Delay
Lowest
Frequency
dB/Octave
Highest
Frequency
dB/Octave
3.15ms
220Hz
13.61
16kHz
>180
6.29ms
110Hz
13.61
16kHz
>180
12.58ms
62.5Hz
13.56
16kHz
>180
25.17ms
62.5Hz
24.58
16kHz
>180
5.3.6
Crossover/HPF/LPF Select
Crossover Select
ThisbuttonreadsCrossoverSelectandisactiveonlywhenacrossoverfilterboxisselected
onaClassiccrossoveroraLinearPhase2Way/3Way.Thisfunctionisnotavailableforthe
LinearPhase4Waymodule.
TapCrossoverSelecttodisplayascrollbarcontainingavailablecrossovertypes.Fora
Classiccrossover,thefollowingscrollbardisplays.
ForaLinearPhase2/3Waycrossover,thefollowingscrollbardisplays.
95
Tochangethecrossovertype:
1.
Tapacrossoverfilterbox,thentapCrossoverSelect.
2.
Dragthescrollbarleftorright,andtapthedesiredcrossover.
3.
TapCrossoverSet,thenYestothewarningmessage.
HPF Select
ThisbuttonreadsHPFSelectandisactiveonlywhenahighpassfilterboxisselected.Follow
theprocessdescribedforCrossoverSelecttosetthehighpassfilter.
LPF Select
ThisbuttonreadsLPFSelectandisactiveonlywhenalowpassfilterboxisselected.Follow
theprocessdescribedforCrossoverSelecttosetthelowpassfilter.
Note: TheLPFisenabledviatheHPF/LPFFunctionsmenu.
5.3.7
HPF Set/LPF Set/Crossover Set/Filter Bypass/Filter Insert

Thisbuttonhasvariousstatesdependingonthestatusoftheselectedfilter.Forfurther
details,refertoSection5.3.6.
HPF Set
ThebuttonreadsHPFSetwhenahighpassfilterhasbeenselectedfromtheHPFSelectscroll
bar.
LPF Set
ThisbuttonreadsLPFSetwhenalowpassfilterhasbeenselectedfromtheLPFSelectscroll
bar.
Crossover Set
ThisbuttonreadsCrossoverSetwhenacrossoverfilterhasbeenselectedfromtheCrossover
Selectscrollbar.
96
Note: NotapplicablefortheLinearPhaseBrickWall4Waycrossover.
Filter Bypass/Filter Insert

ThisbuttondisplaysFilterBypasswhenaparametricfilterisselected,orwhenacrossover
filterhasbeensplit.
ForparametricEQfilters,selectthefilterboxandtapFilterInsert/FilterBypassto
activate/deactivatetheselectedfilter.
AcrossoverHPF/LPFfiltercanbedisabledbysplittingthecrossoverandtappingFilter
Bypass,followedbyOKonthewarningconfirmationdialog.
Note: Linearphasecrossovers,orcombinedClassiccrossovers,cannotbebypassed.To
bypassthemodulesoverallHPForLPF,toggletheHPFEnable/LPFEnablebutton.
5.3.8
Filter Flat
TheFilterFlatbuttonisactiveonlywhenaPEQfilterisselected.Thefunctionisinactiveifa
crossoverisselected.
TapFilterFlattosetthefiltergaintozeroandleavefrequency/bandwidthunchanged.
5.3.9
Filter Delete
TheFilterDeletebuttonisactiveonlywhenaPEQfilterisselected.Thefunctionisinactiveif
acrossoverisselected.
TapFilterDeletetoremovetheselectedPEQfilterfromtheoverlay.
5.3.10
Filter Edit
TapFilterEdittomanuallyentervaluesforaselectedfilterusingtheonscreen(oran
external)keyboard.Thevaluesavailableforadjustmentdependonwhetheracrossoveror
PEQfilterisselected.
Table 5-10 Filter Edit Values
Filter
Editable Values
Crossover/HPF/LPF
Frequency(Hz)
PEQ
Gain(dB),frequency(Hz),andwidth(octave)
97
Tomanuallyeditafilter:
5.3.11
1.
Tapthefilterbox,thentapFilterEdit.
2.
Tapthevaluetoeditatthetopofthescreen(highlightedinblue).
3.
Enterthevalueusingtheonscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard),andtapOK.
4.
TapFilterEditagaintoexitthismode.
Analyzer Bridge/Analyzer Unavailable

PleaserefertoSection5.2.20fordetailsonthisfunction.
5.4
Auxiliary Output Channels

TheContourprocessorprovidesvariousoptionstoconfigurechannelsasauxiliaryoutputs.
Upto12individuallyconfiguredauxiliaryoutputscanbecreated.TheAuxiliaryOutput
modulefilesallowfullbandwidthcustomsettingstobeconfiguredbytheuser.Independent
AuxtabsareprovidedforeachoutputchannelinsteadofaunifiedXovertab.TheseAuxtabs
areinadditiontotheparametricandgraphicEQsettingsthatstillapplytoalloutputsforthe
module.
BecauseadifferentprocessisusedtocalculateoutputspecificEQ,theMesafilterisnot
available.However,inadditiontolowshelf,highshelf,andparametricfilters,theAuxiliary
Outputmodulesprovidebothlowpassandhighpassfilters.InDesignerMode,allpassfilters
arealsoavailable.
Table511showstheavailableAuxiliaryOutputmoduletypesandthemoduleswithwhich
thesemaybeusedinconjunction.
Table 5-11 Auxiliary Output Module Uses
98
Module
Available Uses
1AuxiliaryOutput
ModuleB/DonlywheremoduleA/CcontainsaClassic5Way(CL5way)
module.
2AuxiliaryOutputs
Anymodule.TheothermodulesoftheframemaycontainanyClassicor
LinearPhasemodulethatusestwoorthreeoutputchannels.
3AuxiliaryOutputs
Anymodule.TheothermodulesoftheframemaycontainanyClassicor
LinearPhasemodulethatusestwoorthreeoutputchannels.
4AuxiliaryOutputs
ModuleA/C.AnoptiontoloadeitheraClassic2Wayorthe2Auxiliary
Outputsmodulesisprovidedwhenloadingthe4AuxiliaryOutputsmodule.
5AuxiliaryOutputs
ModuleA/C.ModuleBisloadedwiththe1AuxiliaryOutputmodule.
6AuxiliaryOutputs
ModuleA/BorC/D.Twomodulesareusedforthismoduletype.
Classic2Way+
1Auxiliary(CL2w+1a)
ThisfilemaybeloadedintoanyContourmodule.Theothermodulesofthe
framemaycontainanyClassicorLinearPhasemodulethatusestwoorthree
outputchannels.
Module
Available Uses
Classic3Way+
1Auxiliary(CL3w+1a)
ThisfilemaybeloadedintomoduleAorConly.Theothermodulesofthe
outputchannels.
LinearPhaseBrick
Wall2way+Auxiliary
Output(LP2w+1a)
ThisfilemaybeloadedintoanyContourmodule.Theothermodulesofthe
outputchannels.
5.4.1
Using Auxiliary Outputs

ToconfigureamoduleforoutputspecificEQ,firstloadanAuxiliaryOutputfileintoa
module.
1.
2.
PlacemoduleAofaframeontheMainpage,orselectanexistingmodule.
3.
TapModuleStore/Recall.
4.
SelectanAuxiliaryOutputfilefromthescrollbar,andtapRecall.
5.
TapYesforbothwarningmessages.
6. AfterloadinganAuxiliaryOutputmodulefile,accessEQ/Levelsforthismoduleby
tappingStore/RecallExit,thentapEQ/Levels.
5.4.2
Adding Output-Specific EQ
Theavailableoverlaysforthe3AuxiliaryOutputsmoduleareshownhere:
TheLevelssectionoftheDolbyLakeControllerisidenticaltothatforothermodules,asis
thefunctionalityforPEQ1andGEQ2.PleaserefertoSection5.1forfurtherinformation.
TheXovertabisnotdisplayedbecauseitisnotrelevantforthismoduletype.TheXovertab
willbepresentfortheClassic2Way+1AuxiliaryOutput(CL2w+1a)module.
99
ThreeadditionalAuxtabsarepresent,providingindividualhighpass,lowpass,andEQ
filtersforeachoutput.
1.
TapAux1toselecttheAuxiliaryOutputtabforoutput1.
2.
Addalowandahighshelffilter.
Thescreenshouldlooksimilartothefollowingfigure:
EQaddedtoanAuxtabaffectsonlytheassociatedoutput.ModuleandgroupPEQandGEQ
stillaffectalloutputsofthemodule.
5.4.3
Highpass and Lowpass Filters

ThehighpassandlowpassfiltercontrolsarelocatedundertheAuxOutputFunctions
submenu.
100
WiththeAux1tabselected,tapAuxOutputFunctions.TapHPFEnable,thenLPFEnable
toactivatebothfilters.
Toadjusttheslopeofthesefilters:
1.
TapFilterSelect.AscrollbarappearsdisplayingavailableHPF/LPFtypes.
2.
DragthescrollbarorusetheWWandXXbuttonstoviewavailablefilters.
3.
Selectthe24dBLinkwitz/Rileyfilterfromthescrollbar.
4.
TapFilterSettoactivatethisfilter,thenYestothewarningmessage.
Note: Toprotectloudspeakerdrivers,theaudiooutputfortheaffectedchannelismuted
momentarilywhilethesettingsarechanged.
5.
SelecttheHPFbytappingitsfilterboxlocatedtopleftofthescreen.
6.
Selectthe18dBButterworthfilterfromscrollbar.
7.
TapFilterSet,thenYestothewarningmessage.
8.
TapAuxOutputExittoreturntotheEQ/Levelsmenu.
Note: Steephighpassandlowpassfilters(48dB)requiremoreEQresourcesthanshallower
slopes(6dB).
101
5.4.4
Auxiliary Output Menu Options

ThemenuoptionsshowninthefollowingfigureareavailablewhenanEQfilterisselected
onanAuxiliaryOutputintheEQ/LevelssectionofanAuxiliaryOutputmodule.
AsummaryofthefunctionsrelevanttoAuxiliaryOutputsisshowninTable512;manyare
identicaltothoseusedontheEQandXoverscreens.
Table 5-12 Auxiliary Output Menu
Button
Function
Home
ReturnstotheHomemenu.
EQ/LevelsExit
ReturnstotheHomemenuortotheI/OConfigpageifthescreenwasaccessedvia
theI/OConfigpageinteractiveblockdiagram.
AuxOutputFunctions
ProvidesEQpreferences,highpassandlowpassfilteroptions,andoverlay
copy/paste(andoverlayaccesscontrolsinDesignerMode).
AuxOutputFlat
DeletesallEQ,HPF,andLPFfiltersfromtheselectedauxiliaryoutputchannel.
FilterBypass/FilterInsert
BypassesorinsertsaselectedEQfilter(notapplicabletohighpassandlowpass
filters).
FilterFlat
ResetsthegainoftheselectedEQfiltertozero;frequencyandbandwidthare
unchanged(notapplicableforhighpassandlowpassfilters).
FilterDelete
DeletestheselectedEQfilter(notapplicableforhighpassandlowpassfilters).
FilterEdit
Allowskeyboardentryofgain,frequency,andbandwidthvaluesforEQfiltersand
frequencyonlyforhighpassandlowpassfilters.
Taptherequiredvalueatthetopofthescreen(highlightedinblue)toeditusingthe
onscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard).
ThisbuttonprovidesfurthersubmenusfortheAnalyzerBridge.
AnalyzerBridge
/AnalyzerUnavailable
Ifanapprovedanalyzerand/ortheAnalyzerBridgearenotrunningonthenetwork,
thisbuttonreadsAnalyzerUnavailable.
PleaserefertotheAnalyzerBridgeusersmanualforfurtherinformation,orvisit
www.dolby.com/livesoundforfurtherdetails.
Thefunctionsshownonthefollowingbuttonbararedescribedin
Table513.
102
Table 5-13 Auxiliary Output Buttons
Button
Function
Home
ReturnstotheHomemenu.
AuxOutput
Properties
Accesscontrolfunctions(AuxOutputHideandAuxOutputViewOnly)areavailable
onlyinDesignerMode;refertoChapter18forfurtherdetails.
ProvidesasubmenucontainingEQPreferences.
AuxOutputExit
ReturnstothemainEQ/Levelsmenu.
FilterSelect
Whenselected(orange),ascrollbarisdisplayedwithavailablehighpassandlowpass
filters.Availableonlywhenahighpassorlowpassfilterisactiveandselected;not
applicabletoEQfilters.
FilterSet
Thisfunctionisavailableafterahighpassorlowpassfilterhasbeenselectedfromthe
FilterSelectscrollbar.
HPFEnable
Thehighpassfilterisdisabledwhenthisbuttonisblue,andenabledwhenorange.
LPFEnable
Thelowpassfilterisdisabledwhenthisbuttonisblue,andenabledwhenorange.
AuxOutputCopy
Tappingthisbuttoncopiesthesettingsofthecurrentlyselectedoutput.
ThisbuttonisactiveonlyafterAuxOutputCopyhasbeenused,andwilloverwritethe
selectedauxiliaryoutputwiththesettingsthatwerepreviouslycopied.
AuxOutputPaste
AuxiliaryOutputscanbecopiedandpastedwithinorbetweenmodules,butthedata
cannotbepastedonXover,PEQ,orGEQscreens;thedestinationchannelmustbean
AuxiliaryOutput.
103
Chapter 6
System Store and

RecallMenu Reference
TheDolbyLakeControllerallowstheusertostoreandrecallcompletesystem
configurations.ThisenablesthesameDolbyLakeProcessorstobeusedinentirelydifferent
situations,astheircomplexconfigurationscanbechangedwithinseconds.
FromtheHomemenu,tapSystemStore/Recall.Thebuttonbardisplaysthefollowing
options,andascrollbaralsoappearscontainingfilesandfolders.
Thefirsticononthesystemscrollbarislabeled**MyComputer**.Selectingthisandtapping
Openwillallowyoutonavigatetofoldersandfilesonyourharddriveoranyremovable
disk.
Theotherfilesshownattherootofthisdirectoryarethesystemconfigurationfilesstored
fromwithintheControllersoftware.
Iftherearemanyfoldersorfiles,dragthescrollbartotheleftorright,ortaptheWWorXX
buttons.Mostoptionsonthebuttonbarappeargrayandareinactiveuntilafolderorfileis
selectedonthescrollbar.
6.1
Shortcut to Data/User Folder

SoftwareinstallationoftheDolbyLakeControllerplacesashortcutin:
StartProgramsDolbyLakeControllerUserDataFiles
ThisshortcutcanbeusedtoopentheMicrosoftWindowsfoldercontainingyoursystem
andmodulefiles.
6.2
Recall as New SystemOpen

Thefunctionandlabelofthebuttondependonwhetherafolderorfileisselected.The
buttonisinactivewhenneitherafilenorfolderisselected.
105
System Store and RecallMenu Reference
ThebuttonislabeledOpenwhenafolderisselected.
Toopenafolder:
1.
Tapthedesiredfoldericon.(Theselectionisindicatedbyayellowborder.)
2.
TapOpen.Doubletappingthefoldericonalsoopensthefolder.
ThebuttonislabeledRecallasNewSystemwhenafileisselected;recallingthefilewillclear
allcurrentsettingsfromtheControllerandloadthedetailsstoredinthefileintotherelevant
onlineprocessors.
Torecallasystemconfigurationfileasanewsystem:
1.
Tapthedesiredfiletorecall.
2.
3.
TapRecallasNewSystem.
ConfirmtheactionbytappingtheYesbuttononthewarningmessage.
Note: Recallingasystemconfigurationfileasanewsystemoverwritesthecurrentsettings
intheassociatedDolbyLakeProcessorsandwillaffectaudioprocessing.Presets
storedinhardwareProcessorsarenotoverwrittenwhenasystemconfigurationfile
isrecalledfromtheDolbyLakeController.
6.3
Recall as Subsystem
TheRecallasSubsystembuttonenablesyoutoaddallelementsofasystemconfiguration
filetothecurrentconfiguration.Youcansaveorreloadspecificpartsofyourconfiguration
forreuseinadifferentshow.
Thisfunctionwillnotautomaticallyarrangeiconssotheydonotoverlap.Becarefultolocate
iconsinthedifferentsubsystemfilesthatyoucreatesowhenloadedtheyareindifferent
locationsorpages.Thisfunctionaddsthemodules,supermodules,andgroupstoyour
currentconfiguration(orreplacesthedataiftheprocessoriscurrentlyinuse).
6.4
Recall Compare
TheRecallComparebuttonenablesyoutocompareasystemconfigurationfiletothecurrent
systemconfigurationstoredintheDolbyLakeProcessors.Thisbuttonisactiveonlywhena
fileisselected.
Tocomparethecurrentconfigurationwithonestoredinafile:
106
1.
TapSystemStore/Recall.
2.
Navigatetothefileyouwishtocompare.
3.
Tapthefileicontoselectit.
4.
TapRecallCompare.
5.
ConfirmtheactionbytappingtheYesbuttoninthewarningmessage.
Store Subsystem
Thisfunctioncanhelpidentifyanychangesthathavebeenmadesinceafilewasloaded.
Moduleswithaltereddataareidentifiedbyareddiscbehindtheirnormalicon
(indicatingtheDolbyLakeControllerisoutofsyncwiththeProcessor).
Note: RecallComparedoesnotoverwriteanydataintheProcessors.Audiowillnotbe
changeduntilyoutapthebuttonlabeledUsedataincontroller.
6.5
Recall as Virtual
TheRecallasVirtualbuttonenablesyoutoworkonasystemfilewhennophysicalunitsare
connected.Allframesareseenasvirtual.Oncethesystemhasbeendesigned,thevirtual
framescanbereplacedbyphysicalframes.
Thisfunctionaddsthedatafromtheselectedfile(allmodulesandgroups)tothecurrent
systemconfigurationasvirtualmodules.
6.6
Store System
TheStoreSystembuttonstorestheentiresystemconfiguration.Ifafileisselectedonthe
scrollbar,thenameofthatfilewillappearintheonscreenkeyboard,allowingthefiletobe
overwrittenorforafilenamevariationtobeused.
1.
TapStoreSystem.
2.
Note: Iftheselectedfileissettoreadonly,thisfunctionisinactive(gray).
6.7
Store Subsystem
TheStoreSubsystembuttonstorestheselectedmodules,supermodules,andgroupsasa
subsystem.Onlythedatafromtheselectedmodules(includinganygroupassignments)will
bestoredinthefile.
1.
Navigatethefilesystem,andtapthedesireddestinationfoldertoselectit.
2.
Selecttherequiredmodules,supermodules,andgroupicons.
3.
TapStoreSubsystem.
107
4.
Enterthefilenameusingtheonscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard).
5.
TapOK.
Thescrollbardisplaysthenewfile.
6.8
File Utilities
Thisbuttonprovidesasubmenucontainingfurtherfunctionsthatmanagefilesandfolders
fromwithintheDolbyLakeController.
6.8.1
Open
Thisbuttonisactiveonlywhenafolderisselected.TapOpentoopentheselectedfolder.
6.8.2
Read Only
Thisfunctionprotectsimportantfilesfrombeingaccidentallyoverwrittenordeletedandis
activeonlywhenafileisselected.Thecurrentlyselectedfilesstatusisidentifiedbythecolor
oftheReadOnlybutton:
OrangeTheselectedfileissettoReadOnly.
BlueTheselectedfileisnotsettoReadOnly.
Tochangethestatusofafile:
6.8.3
1.
Tapafilefromthescrollbartoselectit.
2.
TapReadOnlytotogglethefunctionon(orange)andoff(blue).
Rename
Thisbuttonchangesthenameofafileorfolder.
6.8.4
1.
Tapthefile/folderfromthescrollbar.
2.
TapRename.
3.
Enterthenewnameusingtheonscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard).
4.
TapOK.
Delete
Thisbuttonisactiveonlywhenafileorfolderisselected.Whenafileisselected,this
functionisavailableonlyifthefileisnotsettoReadOnly.
Todeleteafileorfolder:
108
1.
Tapafileorfoldertoselectit.
2.
TapDelete.
System Presets
3.
ConfirmtheactionbytappingYesinthewarningmessage.
Note: DeletionofafileispermanentandcannotberestoredusingtheUndofunction.
6.8.5
New Folder
Thisbuttoncreatesanewfolderinthecurrentdirectory.
Tocreateanewfolder:
6.9
1.
Navigatetothedirectorywherethenewfolderwillreside.
2.
TapNewFolder.
3.
Enterthenewfoldernameusingtheonscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard).
4.
TapOK.
System Presets
TheSystemPresetsfunctionallowsentiresystemconfigurationstobestoredinanetworkof
DolbyLakeProcessors.Thisenablesfastretrievalandswitchingofconfigurationsasthereis
minimaldatabeingsentbetweentheControllerandProcessors.
SystempresetsarestoredineachProcessorandretrievedeitherviatheControllersoftware
(describedinthissection)orviathefrontpaneloftheProcessor.
6.9.1
Storing a System Preset in Multiple Processors

TostorethecurrentsystemconfigurationinmultipleDolbyLakeProcessors:
1.
Setuptheconfigurationasrequired.
2.
FromHome,tapSystemStore/Recall,thentapStoreSystem.Thisensuresthatyouhave
abackupoftheexactdata,whichwillbestoredasapresetinthehardware.
3.
TapSystemPresets.
4.
Tapthegroup/moduleiconsthatyouwishtobestoredaspartofthesystempreset.
(Iconsturngreentoindicateselection.)
Forexample,ifyouwishforallframesinyourcurrentsystemconfigurationtobestoredasa
systempreset,tapamodulefromeachframe,orifyouareusinggroups,tapagroupthat
containsallframes(asshowninthefollowingfigure).Todeselectaframeorgroup,tapthe
iconagain.
109
5.
6.9.2
Aftermakingthedesiredmoduleselections:
Taponanemptypresetlocationfromthescrollbar(forexample,Preset1).The
buttonlabeledStoreWithNewNamewillbeactivated.
TapStoreWithNewName.
Enterapresetnameusingtheonscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard),andtap
OK.
Recalling a System Preset into Multiple Processors

TorecallasystempresetintomultipleDolbyLakeProcessors:
1.
FromHome,tapSystemStore/Recall,thentapSystemPresets.
2.
Selecteachframeyouwishtorecallthepresetintobytappingmoduleorgroupsicons.
(Selectedframesareidentifiedbygreenicons.)
3.
Taptherequiredpresetonthescrollbar.
4.
TapRecallandthenOKtothewarningmessages.
Theaudiowillchangequickly,buttheControllerwillnotresyncwiththenetworkuntilyou
exittheSystemPresetmenu.Aflashingwarningmessageconfirmsthis.
Thisenablesquickcomparisonbetweendifferentconfigurationswithouttheneedto
synchronizetheControlleraftereachpresetisrecalled.
Thesystemconfigurationnameofthepresetlastrecalledwillflashatthebottomrightofthe
screen.
110
System Presets
Oncetherequiredsystempresethasbeenrecalled,tapHomeorSystemPresetExitto
synchronizetheControllerwiththenewsettingsthathavebeenloadedintotheProcessors.
Note: IndividualframepresetscanalsoberecalledfromthefrontpanelofeachProcessor.
IfthepresetrecallchangestheconfigurationoftheselectedDolbyLakeProcessor
betweenContourTM,Contour/Mesa,andMesa,awarningmessagewillbedisplayed
andthemoduleswillbereturnedtothescrollbar.
6.9.3
Quick System Preset Recall and Comparison

QuickRecallmodeinstantlyrecallseachsystempresetintoallselectedframeswhenthe
presetlocationonthescrollbaristapped.Noconfirmationmessagesaredisplayedwhilein
thismode,andallotherpresetfunctionsaredisabled.
Toenablefastrecall/comparisonofsystempresets:
1.
2.
Selecteachframeyouwishtorecallthepresetintobytappingmoduleorgroupsicons.
(Selectedframesareidentifiedbyagreenicon.)
3.
TapQuickRecall.(Orangeequalsactive;blueequalsinactive.)
4.
Tapapresetlocationfromthescrollbar.
5.
Repeattheprevioussteptocomparewithothersystempresets.
Note: NoconfirmationorwarningmessagesaredisplayedwhileinQuickRecallmode
(exceptwhenthepresetinvolvesaconfigurationchangeasdescribedinthe
precedingnote).Tappingthepresetlocationwillimmediatelyloadtheselected
systempresetintoallselectedframes.
6.9.4
Storing over an Existing Preset

FollowthestepsshowninSection6.9.1,butselectasystempresetlocationthatisalready
usedandtapStoreinsteadofNewStore.Thedatainthepresetlocationoftheselected
frameswillbereplacedbythecurrentsystemconfiguration.
6.9.5
Clearing a Preset Location

ToclearasystempresetlocationfrommultipleDolbyLakeProcessors:
1.
2.
Selecteachframeyouwishtoclearthepresetfrombytappingmoduleorgroupsicons.
(Selectedframesareidentifiedbyagreenicon.)
3.
Tapthepresetlocationthatyouwishtoclearfromthescrollbar.
4.
TapClear,thenOKtothewarningmessages.
111
6.9.6
Preset Mismatch
Ifoneormoreoftheselectedframescontainsadifferentconfigurationinaparticularpreset
location,PresetMismatchdisplaysasthenameforthatsystempresetlocation.
AmismatchoccursifdifferentconfigurationsarestoredseparatelyindifferentDolbyLake
Processors,andtheseProcessorsareselectedtogetherintheSystemPresetmenu.
TocorrectaPresetMismatchstatus,eitheremptythepresetlocationusingtheClear
function,orusetheStorewithNewNamefunctiontostorethedataofthecurrentlyloaded
configurationintoallselectedframes.
TheRecallandStorebuttonswillbedisabledwhenalocationisselectedformultipleframes
thatcontainaPresetMismatch.
112
Chapter 7
ModulesMenu
Reference
FromtheHomemenu,tapModules.TheModulesmenuandscrollbarappearasshown
below.Thescrollbarshowsallprocessorsconnectedtothenetwork.
Thescrollbarpicturedabovedisplaysthefollowing(fromlefttoright):
Avirtualframeiconthatisalwaysavailableforcreatingentiresystemswhileworking
offline.
FourmodulesofaDolbyLakeProcessor(configuredasContourTM,labeledCL3Way)
areavailableforuse.
ThefirstthreemodulesofaLakeMesaQuadEQTMProcessorarebeingusedinthe
currentconfiguration.
Ifmanyprocessorsareavailable,tapanddragthescrollbartotheleft/right,ortaptheblue
WWorXXbuttons.Mostoptionsonthebuttonbarappeargray(inactive)untilamoduleis
placedfromthescrollbarontotheMainpage.
Note: Theprocessorsaresortedinalphabeticalorderonthescrollbarbyframename.
7.1
EQ/Levels
NavigatetotheModulesmenu,andtaptheEQ/LevelsbuttontodisplaytheparametricEQ,
graphicEQ,Xover,andLevelsscreensfortheselectedmodule.Thisfunctionisactiveonly
whenamodulehasbeenselectedintheworkarea.Formoreinformation,pleasereferto
Section5.1.
113
ModulesMenu Reference
7.2
I/O Config
TheI/OConfigpageprovidesI/Oconfiguration,technicalinformation,inputmutes,an
interactivesignalpaththatcanbeusedtodirectlynavigatetotheLevels/EQ/Xoverscreens,
andtheabilitytoresetorreconfigureaprocessor.
ToviewtheI/OConfigpage:
1.
FromHome,accesstheModulesmenu.
2.
Selectamoduleiconintheworkarea,andtapI/OConfig.(TheI/OConfigbuttonis
activeonlywhenamoduleisselectedintheworkarea.)
ThisfigureshowstheI/OConfigpageforaDolbyLakeProcessorconfiguredasa
Contour/Mesahybrid.Thesectionsthatfollowdescribeeachscreen/functionavailablefrom
theI/OConfigpageinfurtherdetail.
7.2.1
Digital Clock Configuration

TheDolbyLakeProcessorprovidestwodigitalclocks:
114
PrimaryDigitalClockLockstoasamplerateof48,96,or192kHz
(nosamplerateconversion,verylowlatency).
SampleRateConverterClock(SRCClock)Locksto44.1,48,88.2,96,176.4,and
192kHz.
I/O Config
ToaccesstheDigitalClockConfigurationwindow,tapthezoombuttonlocatedatthetop
leftoftheI/OConfigpage:
Apopupwindowdisplays:
Auto Detection
Bydefault,themostappropriatedigitalclocksareautomaticallydetected.Thefirstvalid
clockintheorderofthelistshownbelowischosentoconfigurethePrimaryClockas
48/96/192kHz,andtheSRCClockas44.1/88.2/176.4kHz.
BNCWordClock
AES1(In1+2)
AES2(In3+4)
AES3(In5+6)
AES4(In7+8)
S/PDIF
InternalClock(88.2or96kHz)
Ifaclocksignalisunavailable,ortemporarilylost,theautomaticdetectionprocesschooses
thenextvalidclocksourcefromthelist,provideditmatchestheselectedbaserate(either
115
44.1or48kHz).Ifavalidclocksourceisdetectedfromasourcewhichishigheronthelist
thanthecurrentlyselectedsource,thentheclockwillswitchtousethehigherprioritysource.
Note: TheSRCClockhastwooptionsforautomaticclockdetection:Auto44andAuto48.
Thesesettingsprovideautomaticdetectionwithinaparticularrangeoffrequencies
(either44.1/88.2/176.4kHzor48/96/192kHz).
Manual Config
Forafixedconfiguration,itispossibletofixtheclockselectionindependentlyforeachdigital
clock.
1.
TaptherequiredclockfromtheClockSourceSelectoratthebottomoftheDigitalClock
Configurationwindow.
2.
Taptheiconshowingthecurrentlyselectedclockundertherelevantclockheadinginthe
topleft(Primary)ortopright(SRC)sectionsofthewindow.
Thelargericonineachofthewindowsshowstheselectedclock,andtheassociatedtext
confirmstheratesthatareavailablewhenusingthisclockforeitherinputsoroutputs.
Dante Clock
WhenDanteisenabledonaDolbyLakeProcessor,thePrimaryclockisusedforDante
purposes.OneprocessorwillbeallocatedastheDanteMaster,andallotherswillbeDante
Slaves.TheDanteMasterpriorityfollowsthesameorderasAutoDetection,withaprocessor
usingBNCWordClockbeingchosenoveronewithanAESsignal,andsoon.
Wherethereisnodistinguishingfeatureforaprocessortobeselected(forexample,all
processorshaveaBNCWordClockconnected,ormultipleprocessorshaveanAESsignal),
thenDanteusestheprocessorwiththelowestMacAddressasauniquedistinguishing
feature.
TheDanteMastermaylocktoanexternalclockviathePrimaryClockasshownisthe
examplebelow.Ifyourequireanothersignaltypetobelockedtothebox,usetheSRCClock.
TheexamplebelowshowshowtwodifferingAESsignalscanbeconnectedtooneDolby
LakeProcessor,withDantelockingtothePrimaryClocksAESsignal:
116
I/O Config
AllotherprocessorsonthenetworkwillbeDanteSlaves,andthePrimaryClockwillreport
thattheclockisoverriddenbyDante,asshowninthefollowingscreenshot.Anyother96
kHzsignal,or44.1kHzbasedsignalshouldbelockedusingtheSRCClock.
117
CobraNet Clock
ForDolbyLakeProcessorscontainingaCobraNetcardwithavalidCobraNetsignal,the
ClockSourceSelectorscrollbarwilldisplayprimaryclockand96kHzinternalclock,as
shown:
TheCobraNetnetworkdecideswhichCobraNetdevicewillcontroltheclocksetting.For
furtherinformationonCobraNet,pleaserefertoSection7.2.7.
Note: CobraNetclockinformationisavailableonlywhenaCobraNetcardisinstalled.
7.2.2
Input Configuration
Eachinputmaybeconfiguredtouseanyavailableinputsource.SourcesincludeAES/EBU
digitalinputs,S/PDIFdigitalinputs,CobraNetdigitalinputs(whenaCobraNetcardis
installed),Danteinputs,andanaloginputs.
118
I/O Config
Toaccesstheinputconfiguration,tapthezoombutton,oranyareaoftheinputconfiguration
summarytextontheI/OConfigpage,asshownhere:
TheInputConfigurationwindowwillbedisplayed:
Input Configuration Screen

Autoselect
TheinputAutoselectfeatureenablesyoutosetuparedundantsystem.TheProcessorwill
attempttousethefirstsignal.Ifthefirstsignalisunavailable,itwilltrythesecond,third,or
fourthsignal.
Force
TheinputForcefeatureforcestheinputtotheselectedinput.
119
Input Selector Search Filters
AES/SPDIFDisplaystheavailableAES/SPDIFinputsignals
DanteDisplaystheavailableDanteinputsignals
CobraNetDisplaystheavailableCobraNetinputsignals
AnalogDisplaystheavailableanaloginputsignals
SearchFilterstheavailableinputsignals
Input Configuration Screen - Display Details
AES
120
AutoChoosestheclockmostrelevanttotheincomingdigitalsignal.Forexample,ifthe
inputsignalis48kHz,thePrimaryClockwillbeselected;iftheinputis44.1kHz,the
SRCClockwillbeselected.ThedefaultisPrimaryClockifadigitalinputsignalisnot
present.
PrimaryUsesthePrimaryClock,regardlessofwhethertheclockratematchesthe
incomingsignalrate.
SRCUsestheSRCClock,regardlessofwhethertheclockratematchestheincoming
signalrate.
I/O Config
Analog
AnalogInputHeadroom(RMS)Containsafourwaytoggleforchoosing10,16,21,or
26dBu.TaptherequiredheadroomleveltosetthemaximumRMSlevelfortheinput.
Note: TheContourPro26andMesaQuadEQprovideadjustmentforInputHeadroom
throughafaderontheLevelspageunderHeadroom/AmpClip.
DigitalGainOffset(dB)Representstheamountofgainincreaseorreductionthatwillbe
appliedtothedigitalinputsignaltoallowseamlesstransitionbetweenallinputtypes.Asthe
levelsofdigitalandanalogsignalvary,thedigitaloffsetcanbeusedtoadjustthedigital
inputsignalleveltomatchtheanaloginputsignallevel.Thiscanbeusedinconjunctionwith
Autoselecttoprovideanautomaticanalogbackuptotheincomingdigitalaudio.Separate
valuesareprovidedforAESandCobraNet;tochangeanoffset,tapthevaluethatyouwish
tochangeandenteranewvalueusingtheonscreenkeyboard(oranexternalkeyboard).
TheseoffsetsareshownontheI/OConfigpageundereachinputpairsummary.
Note: WhenaligninganaloganddigitalsignalsusingtheDigitalGainOffsetsetting,the
+4dBuReferencemetermodeshouldbeusedtoensurethatlevelsarematchedwith
respecttoacommoninternalreference.
121
Input Mutes
MutedinputEnablesyoutomutetheaudiofromtheinput
UnmutedinputEnablesyoutounmuteaudiofromtheinput
7.2.3
Iso-Float Status/Virtual Frame I/O Card Configuration

Whenanonlineframeisselected,thisbuttonwillreadAnalogIsoFloatStatus;whena
VirtualFrameisselected,thisbuttonreadsVirtualFrameI/OCardConfiguration.
TheIsoFloatTMStatusreportstheground/liftsettingsforeachanalogI/Ocard.Asummaryof
thecurrentstatusisshownonthebottomleftoftheI/OConfigpageforonlineprocessors.
TheIsoFloatStatuswindowisaccessedbytappingthezoombuttontotheleftofthis
summaryasshowninthefollowingscreenshot:
Thecurrentstatusisshownbyanorangebutton,andwhethersoftwarecontrolisavailableis
alsoidentifiedperI/Ocard.
122
I/O Config
IftheswitchontheanalogconvertercardisintheLift/SCposition,thenthisscreencanbe
usedtosettheground/liftstatusforthatcard.Iftheswitchontheanalogconvertercardisset
togrounded(GND),thensoftwarecontrolisdisabled.
ThefollowingisdisplayedinthesamelocationoftheI/OConfigpageforVirtualFrames:
123
AninteractivepageisdisplayedshowingalinedrawingofthebackpanelofaDolbyLake
Processor.Thisallowsdraganddropfunctionalitytoconfigurethisofflineprocessorin
exactlytherequiredhardwareconfigurationandwillprovidetherelevantI/Ooptionsbased
onthisconfiguration.
7.2.4
Input Mix Summary and Input Mixers/Switch

InputmixsummariesandswitchesareshownontheI/OConfigpageaspartofthe
interactivesignalpathforeachmodule.Theavailablenumberofinputsvariesperproduct
andmoduletypeasdescribedinTable71.
Table 7-1 Input Mix Summaries
Product
Input Mix Summary
Input Mixer
with Faders
LakeProcessor
TM
(MesaEQ Module)
Eightchannelinputgainmixer
Yes
LakeProcessor
(ContourModule)
Fourchannelinputgainmixer
Yes
MesaQuadEQ
Fourchannelinputgainmixer
Yes
ContourPro26
124
Twochannelswitch
(A/B/A+B)
No
I/O Config
Input Mix Summary

Theblockdiagramforeachmoduleshowstheconnectedinputsandassociatedgainsettings.
ThefollowingexampleshowsaDolbyLakeProcessorMesamodule.
Input Mixer
TheInputMixerprovidestheabilitytomixuptoeightincomingaudiosignalsforProcessor
MesaEQmodules,orfourincomingaudiosignalsforProcessorContourmodulesandforthe
LakeMesaQuadEQprocessor.
Note: TheInputMixerisnotapplicablefortheContourPro26.
TheInputMixercanbeaccessedfromtwolocations:
BytappingtheinputmixsummaryfromtheI/OConfigpage
BytappingtheInputMixerzoombuttonfromtheLevelspage
125
Theinputmixerprovidesgainfadersandon/offconnectionbuttonsasshowninthe
followingscreenshot:
Toconnect/disconnectaninput,tapthebuttonlabeledOn/Offordragthefader.Thetotal
moduleinputmixisshownonthefarrightoftheInputMixerwindow.
Input +4dBu Button

TaptheInput+4dBubuttontoviewthephysicalinputsignalmeterrelativeto+4dBu.Tap
thebuttonagaintoreturntothedefaultDigitalClip(DClip)view.
TheDClipmeteringmodeshowstheaudiolevelpriortoanygainadjustment(input
headroom,ordigitalgainoffset),andindicateswhentheA/Dconverterswillclip.The+4dBu
meteringmodeshowstheaudiolevelafteranygainadjustment,andisusefulforcomparing
levelsofdifferentinputsignalspriortoprocessing.
Thisisaglobalfunction;allphysicalinputmetersthroughoutthesystemdisplaythe
Note: InputMixersettingsarestoredinsystemconfigurationfilesandinframe/system
presets.TheInputMixerconfigurationsaretransferredduringtheFrameReplace
function.InputMixerconfigurationsarenotstored,recalled,copied,orpastedvia
moduleorbaseconfigurationfiles.
126
I/O Config
Auxiliary Input Toggle Switch

Aspareauxiliarychannelisavailableonthefollowingmoduletypes:
Classic2Way+1AuxiliaryOutput(CL2w+1a)
Classic3Way+1AuxiliaryOutput(CL3w+1a)
LinearPhaseClassic2Way+1AuxiliaryOutput(LP2w+1a)
Thesemoduletypesprovideaseparateinputselectorfortheauxiliarychannel.Thisallows
theauxiliarychanneltobesourcedindependentlyofthetwowayinputsource,orfromthe
samepostinputEQsignal.(Theparametric[PEQ]andgraphic[GEQ]overlaysforthetwo
waysectionalsoaffecttheauxiliarychannelwhentheinputswitchissetasshowninthe
previousfigure.)
Contour Pro26 Input Switch

ForContourPro26products,eitherinputAorB,oracombinationofboth,canbeselectedas
thesourcesignal;thereisnogaincontrolforthisproducttype.
Tochangetheinputusedasthesourcesignal,taptheinputswitch:
TheinputselectortogglesbetweenInputA,InputA+B,andInputB.
127
7.2.5
Output Configuration
TheOutputConfigurationwindowisdisplayedaftertappingthezoombuttonlocatedtothe
rightofeachoutputontherightsideoftheI/OConfigpage.Asummaryoftheoutput
connectionsforeachmoduleappearsatthebottomofeachmodulecellontheI/OConfig
page.
Aftertappinganyofthesezoombuttons,thefollowingOutputConfigurationwindowis
displayed.
Output Configuration Screen
Thetextontheleftsideofthescreenliststheoutputchannelsforeachmodule.Theorange
numberedblocksdenotethedigitaloutputsfromwhichthesignalwillbesent.Thesame
audiochannelcanbesentfrommultipledigitaloutputs,buteachdigitaloutputcancontain
onlyonechannelofaudio.
ThefollowingsectionsdiscusstheiconsundertheSourceandDestinationareas.
128
I/O Config
Source
Thetwoarrowbuttons
enableyoutoselectwhichsourcetoroutetotheDolbyLake
Processoroutputs.ThedefaultsettingisModuleOutputs,whicharetheDolbyLake
ProcessorDSPoutputs.ItcanalsobesettoAESInputsandAnalogInputs(DanteInputsor
CobraNetInputs,ifavailable),whichbypasstheDSP.
Destination
Thetwoarrowbuttons
enableyoutoselecttheoutputstoroutethesourceto.The
defaultsettingisAES/SPDIF.ItcanalsobesettoAnalog(ifanalogoutputcardsarepresent),
Dante,andCobraNet,ifavailable.
Thefollowingscreenshotsshowsomeroutingoptions.
ModuleOutputs
TheeightDSPoutputs(ModuleOutputs)areroutedtothefirsteightAESoutputs.
ThesameDSPoutputsarealsoroutedtothefirsteightDanteoutputs.
129
Analog Inputs
Theeightanaloginputsaredirectlyroutedtothefirsteightanalogoutputs.
Themagnifyingglass
130
providesdifferentoptions,dependingontheselecteddestination.
I/O Config
IfAnalogOutputsisselected,tappingthemagnifyingglassicondisplaystheAnalogIso
FloatStatusscreen:
Grounded
I/Ocardwillbeconnectedtoground.
Floating
I/Ocardwillnotbeconnectedtoground.
I/OCard
CardintheDolbyLakeProcessortoprovideeitherinputsoroutputs.
SCDisabled (SoftwareControlDisabled)IftheI/OcardontheDolbyLakeProcessorhas
itsIsoFloatswitchsettoLift/SC,theusercancontroltheGroundedorFloatingusingthe
DolbyLakeController.IfthisswitchissettoGrounded,softwarecontrolisdisabled.
IfAES/SPDIFOutputsisselected,tappingthemagnifyingglassicondisplaysthe
AES/SPDIFOutputSampleRateConfigurationscreen:
PrimaryClockLockstoasamplerateof48,96,or192kHz(nosamplerateconversion,very
lowlatency)
SRCClockLockstoasamplerateof44.1,88.2,or176.4kHz
131
Note: ThesignalfromAES8(DigOut15/16)isalsoduplicatedontheS/PDIFoutput.
WhenDanteisavailable,tappingthemagnifyingglassicondisplaystheDante
Configurationscreen.SeeSection3.3.7fordetailsaboutDante.
WhenCobraNetisavailable,tappingthemagnifyingglassicondisplaystheCobraNet
Configurationscreen.SeeSection7.2.7formoredetails.
132
I/O Config
Tappingthisicon,
,displaysawarningmessage.Themessageaskswhetheryouwantto
disconnectallselectedoutputsassignmentsontheProcessor.
7.2.6
Latency Match
ThisbuttonisavailableonDolbyLakeProcessorsonly;itisbluewhendisabledandorange
whenenabled.
TheLatencyMatchfeatureaddsanadditionallatencytotheDolbyLakeProcessorsignalso
itcanbeseamlesslyintegratedwithlegacyContourPro26orMesaQuadEQproducts.This
LatencyMatchfeaturefunctionalityisbasedonthefollowingcriteria:
TheinputtypesforlegacyproductsandtheDolbyLakeProcessorarethesame(analog
orAESonly).
TheinputsampleratesforlegacyproductsandtheDolbyLakeProcessorarethesame
whereAESinputsarebeingused.
Theoutputsareanalog.
Foranyotherscenarios,pleasemakeanyappropriatedelayadjustmentsmanually.
7.2.7
CobraNet
ThebuttonisvisibleonlyforaDolbyLakeProcessorthatcontainsaCobraNetcard.The
followingscreenisdisplayedwhenthisbuttonistapped:
133
ConductorStatusDisplayseitherConductororPerformer.(AConductorprovidesthe
digitalclocktotheCobraNetnetwork,PerformerslocktotheConductorsdigitalclock.)
PriorityAnautomaticallyassignedvaluebasedontheclockselectionasdefinedinTable
72.TheCobraNetnetworkusesthisvaluetodeterminewhichprocessorwillbecomethe
Conductor.
LatencyAuserdefinedsettingforCobraNetspecificlatency.(EnsureallCobraNetdevices
onthenetworkareconfiguredwiththesamelatencyselection.)
BundleAssignmentAuserdefinedbundlenumbering.CobraNetbundlescontaineight
audiochannels(20bit/48kHz)whicharenumberedtoenableanotherdevicetousethese
channelsfromtheCobraNetnetwork.Bundleassignmentrangesare:0=notassigned;1255
=MulticastBundle;25665279=UnicastBundle.
AddressesAuserdefinableIPaddressisprovidedfortheCobraNetcard(thisisdistinctto
theDolbyLakeProcessor).Themediaaccesscontrol(MAC)addressoftheCobraNetcardis
providedforinformationonly,alongwiththecardsfirmwareversion.
Table 7-2 CobraNet Conductor Priority Values
Clock Type
BNCWordClock
AES1
AES2
AES3
AES4
SPDIF
Internal/CobraNet
(alwayspresent)
Auto-Primary-ClockConfiguration
(First Clock Found in AutoClock-Priority List)
Manual-Primary-ClockConfiguration
(Clock Specifically
Selected)
CobraNet Conductor
Priority Value
CobraNet Conductor
Priority Value
Yes
92
128
No
N/Aselectnextclock
31
Yes
82
127
Present
and
Locked
No
N/Aselectnextclock
30
Yes
72
126
No
N/Aselectnextclock
29
Yes
62
125
No
N/Aselectnextclock
28
Yes
52
124
No
N/Aselectnextclock
27
Yes
42
123
No
N/Aselectnextclock
26
Yes
25
122
Note: CobraNetfunctionsareavailableonlywhenaCobraNetcardisinstalled.
134
I/O Config
7.2.8
Technical Data
ThisinformationisavailablebytappingthebuttonlabeledTechnicalDatafromtheI/O
Configpagebuttonbar(orpressing<F5>)whenaDolbyLakeProcessorisselected.Itis
permanentlydisplayedontheleftsideoftheI/OConfigpageforContourPro26andMesa
QuadEQprocessors.
Product/ModelThedescriptionandmodelnumberfortheselectedprocessor.
MACAddressTheMACaddressistheuniqueEthernetaddressoftheselectedprocessor.
IPAddressConfigThisfieldissetbydefaulttoAutoZeroConf.Itcanalsobesetto
AutoDHCP(ifaDHCPserverisused)ortoFixed.
135
IPAddressTheInternetprotocol(IP)addressidentifieswhichprocessorissendingor
receivinginformation.
SubnetMaskThesubnetmaskisusedforIPaddressrouting;thedefaultsettingis
255.255.0.0whenAutoZeroConfisselected.
Front10MbitThissettingforcesthefrontEthernetportto10Mbps.
Back10MbitThissettingforcesthebackEtherConEthernetportto10Mbps.
LCDBrightnessThevaluebetween0(dim)and10(bright)adjuststhebrightnessofLCDs
onthefrontpanel.
LEDBrightnessThevaluebetween0(dim)and10(bright)adjuststhebrightnessofLEDs
onthefrontpanel.
ViewingAngleThevaluebetween10(viewfrombelow)and+10(viewfromabove).It
adjuststhefrontpanelLCDviewingangle.
ThresholdTempThetemperatureatwhichfanspeedincreases(C).
TemperatureThecurrenttemperatureinsidetheprocessor(C).
IDTheuniqueDolbyLakeproductidentifier.
FirmwareThefirmwareversion.
7.2.9
Input Mutes
InputMutesrepresenttheactualinputstotheDolbyLakeProcessor.Mutinganinputvia
InputMuteswillmutethesignaltoallmodulesthatareconnectedtothatinput.
ThefloatingInputMutestoolbarshownbelowisavailableby:
TappingInputMutesfromthebuttonbarontheI/OConfigpage
(orpressing<F6>)
TappingtheInputMuteszoombuttonfromtheLevelspage
Note: InputMutesarenotavailablewhenaProcessorisoffline.InputMutesarenot
availableforContourPro26.
136
I/O Config
7.2.10
Interactive Signal Path Block Diagram

ThesignalpathofeachmoduleisshowningraphicalformontherightoftheI/OConfig
page.Eachoftheblockscanbeselectedtonavigatedirectlytotheassociated
EQ/Levels/Xover/Aux/HPF/LPFscreens.
Note: AfterusingtheinteractiveblockdiagramstoaccesstheEQ/Levels/Xover/Aux/HPF/LPF
screens,theEQ/LevelsExitbuttonreturnsyoutotheI/OConfigpageinsteadofHome.
7.2.11
Input Selection (Contour Pro26 and Mesa Quad EQ Only)

SomeContourPro26unitsarefittedwithaspecialfivepinstereoI/OdigitalXLRconnector.
Thisprovidesdigitalinputonlywhenconfiguredasanytypeofcrossover/loudspeaker
processor.TheStereoInsertprogramprovidessimultaneousdigitalstereoinputandoutput.
TheMesaEQprocessorhastwopairsofAES/EBUstereoinputsthatcanbeindependently
settoacceptanalogordigitalinput.Theinputoptionsdescribedinthefollowingsectionsare
availableonsubmenusInput1/2SelectandInput3/4Select.
Autoselect AES/Anlg
ContourPro26andMesaEQprocessorsfittedwithdigitalinputsoffertheoptionofanalog
onlyordigitalandanaloginputs.Bydefault,theprocessorsautomaticallyselectwhichinput
isbeingused.
Whenactive(orange),theAutoselectAES/Anlgfunctiondetectsandlocksadigitalinput
signal,orusestheanaloginputsignalifadigitalsignalcannotbedetected.
Table73summarizestheavailableinputselectionsandtheassociatedoutputsignals
available.
137
Table 7-3 Input Selections
Controller Input
Selection Status
Signals
Autoselect
AES/Anlg
AESOnly
AnalogOnly
AES+Analog*
ForcedAES
ForcedAnalog
Signal Used
Analog Output
Digital Output
AES
Yes
Yes
Analog
Yes
No
AES*
Yes*
Yes*
AESOnly
AES
Yes
Yes
AnalogOnly
None
No
No
AESOnly
None
No
No
AnalogOnly
Analog
Yes
Yes
If the digital signal is lost while in Autoselect AES/Analog mode, the processor will switch to use
analog input. Analog output will continue (using the analog input source), although digital output will
cease. This is applicable to Contour Pro26 and Mesa Quad EQ processors only.
Forced Analog/Forced Digital

Thesesettingslocktheinputsignalstotheassociatedanalogordigitalinputs,effectively
disablingtheotherinput.
Thesebuttonsareactiveonlyifbothdigitalandanaloginputsareavailableontheselected
processor.
Dig Out 96kHz/Dig Out 48kHz

Thebuttonstogglebetweenoutputsampleratesof48and96kHz.
Thesebuttonswillbeactiveonlyifbothdigitalandanaloginputsareavailableonthe
selectedprocessor,andtheForcedAnalogbuttonisselected.
7.2.12
Frame Config/Factory Reset

ForDolbyLakeProcessors,theFrameConfigmenuoffersconfigurationas:
ContourFourContourModules(ABCD)
Contour/MesaEQCombinationTwoContourmodules(AB)andfourMesaEQ
modules(CDEF)
MesaEQEightMesaEQmodules(ABCDEFGH)
FortheContourPro26orMesaQuadEQ,theFactoryResetoptionconfigurestheprocessor
initsrelevantfactorydefaultstate.
Note: Forallproducts,configuringorresettingaprocessorthroughtheDolbyLake
ControllerretainsthecurrentIPaddresssettingandsystem/framepresets.
138
Copy/Paste/Replace
7.3
Label & Lock

FromtheModulesmenu,tapLabel&Locktoviewasubmenuwithfunctionstolabela
moduleorframeandallowasystemdesignertolockmoduleandbaseconfigurations.
7.3.1
Module Label
TheModuleLabelisauserdefinablevalueatthebottomofthemoduleiconthatidentifies
themodule.
Tolabelamodule:
7.3.2
1.
TapthedesiredmoduleiconontheMainpage.
2.
TapModuleLabel,enteramodulename,andtapOK.
Frame Label
TheFrameLabelisatencharacter(DolbyLakeProcessor)orfourcharacter(ContourPro26
andMesaQuadEQ)userdefinedvaluethatappearsonthemoduleiconandonthefront
paneloftheprocessor.TheFrameLabelallowsthemoduleiconstobeassociatedwitha
specificDolbyLakeProcessor.
Tolabelaframe:
1.
Tapanymoduleoftheframeyouwishtolabel.
2.
TapFrameLabel.
3.
Enteraframename,andtapOK.
Note: Whenaframeconsistsoftwomodules(twoandthreewaymodules),namingoneof
themautomaticallyupdatestheothermoduleiconwiththenewlabel.
7.3.3
Module and Base Configuration Locking

ThefollowingfunctionsareactiveonlyinDesignerMode:
ModuleUnlocked/UnlockModule
SetModPassword
BaseUnlocked/UnlockBase
SetBasePassword
Fordetailsonthesefunctions,pleaserefertoChapter18.
139
7.4
Copy/Paste/Replace
FromtheModulesmenu,taptheCopy/Paste/Replacebuttontoviewasubmenuthatallows
thetransferringofdatabetweenmodules.Thisenablesfastandeasysetupofmultiple
speakersofthesametypeandconfiguration.TheReplacefunctionallowsyoutoassigna
differentphysicalprocessortoperformthetaskofaselectedprocessor(thatis,toswapdata
fromoneprocessortoanother).TheBatchReplacefunctionallowsyoutoquicklytransfer
datafromavirtualorofflineconfigurationtoanothersetofonlineframes.
7.4.1
Copy
Thisfunctionisactiveonlywhenamoduleiconisselected.
Tocopydatafromamodule:
7.4.2
1.
Tapthemoduleiconthatcontainsthedatatocopy.
2.
TapCopy.
Paste
Thisfunctionisactiveonlywhenmoduledatahasbeenpreviouslycopiedandadestination
moduleiconisselected.
Topastedatatoamodule:
1.
Tapthemoduleiconinwhichtopastethedata.
2.
TapPaste.
Note: Youcannotpastedatatoamodulethatcurrentlyhasadifferentmoduletypeifthe
destinationmoduleiscurrentlyassignedtoagroup.Tochangethedestination
modulesmoduletypebycontinuingwiththePastefunction,youmustfirstdeassign
themodulefromthegroup(refertoChapter9).AMesaEQmodulecannotbepasted
intoaContourmoduleandviceversa.
7.4.3
Replace Frame
TheReplacefunctionallowstransferofmodule/groupdatabetweenprocessors.Ifa
previouslyusedprocessorisnotavailable,oryouwishtochangewhichunitperformswhich
task,followthesesteps:
140
1.
TapCopy/Paste/ReplacefromtheModulesmenu.
2.
Tapamodulefromtheframeyouwishtoreplaceontheworkarea.
3.
TapReplaceFrame.Themodulescrollbarappearsdisplayingusedandavailable
modules.
Copy/Paste/Replace
4.
Tapanymodulefromanavailableframeonthescrollbar,andtapCompleteReplace.To
locateaparticularprocessor,taptheSelbuttononthefrontpaneltocenterthatuniton
thescrollbar.
Note: Aframecanonlybereplacedwithaframeofthesameproducttypethatisnot
currentlyintheworkarea(thatis,itmustbeavailableonthemodulescrollbar).
AllmodulesofaframemustbepresentonthemodulescrollbarfortheReplace
Framefunctiontowork.
FortheDolbyLakeProcessor,thesourceanddestinationframesmustbeinthesame
configuration(forContour,Mesa,orContour/Mesahybrids).
7.4.4
Complete Replace
ThisbuttoncompletestheReplaceFramefunction.Thisfunctionisactiveonlywhenthe
Replacebuttonisselectedandadestinationmodulehasbeenselectedfromthemodulescroll
bar.Unlessavirtualframeisselected,allmodulesintheworkareaarereturnedtothescroll
barandthosepreviouslyonthescrollbarareloadedwiththedatafromthesourceframeand
becomepartofthesystemconfiguration.
7.4.5
Batch Replace
Thisbuttonisactive(blue)regardlessofwhetheramoduleisselectedintheworkarea.When
tappedascreensimilartothiswillbedisplayed:
141
Thelefthalfofthescreendisplaysallofflineorvirtualframesthatarepresentinthesystem,
andtherighthalfdisplaysallonlineframes.Notethattocompletethisreplaceoperation,all
onlinedestinationframesmustbeonthemodulescrollbar,andnotinuseinthecurrent
configuration.
FramesaresortedbyFrameType(product/configuration),thenbyframename.Ifthe
producttypeandframenamematchbetweenanonlineandofflineframe,anumberwill
automaticallybeassignedtothedestinationframe.
PressingtheME/SELbuttononthefrontpanelwillidentifytheselecteddestinationframe
withyellowhighlighting.(Thefirstframeinthelistisselectedintheprecedingexample.)
AssigningtheVirtualFramestotheDestinationFrames
Withtheexceptionofverysmallsystems,thevirtual/offlineframemustbelabeledtoenable
identificationofwhichframeitis.Ifthedestinationframeisalsolabeledwithamatching
name,andisofthesameproducttypeandconfiguration,theassignmentwillbeautomatic.
TappingStartReplacewillcopyalldataonallframes.
Ifthedestinationframesarenotlabeled:
1.
Typethecorrespondingoffline/virtualframenumberintotheeditablefield,eitherviathe
onscreenoramanualkeyboard.
2.
Thedestinationframewillmoveupordownthelistsothatitisonthesamerowasits
correspondingoffline/virtualframe.
3.
TapStartReplace,thentapYEStotheconfirmationmessage.
Alloffline/virtualframedatawillbetransferredtotheonlineframes.
7.5
Remove
TapRemovetodeletetheselectedmodulefromthecurrentsystemconfiguration.The
moduleiconwillappearbackonthescrollbarindicatingitisavailableforuse.Toremovea
modulefromthecurrentsystem,tapthemoduleiconfromtheModulesmenuandtap
Remove.Audiowillnotbeaffectedunlessthemoduleisassignedtoagroupthatcontains
settingsthataffecttheaudioofthemodule.
Youcanalsoremoveamodulebydraggingtheicontothemodulescrollbarwheninthe
Modulesmenu.
Note: Nowarningmessageisdisplayedunlesstheselectedmoduleisassignedtoagroup.
Inthisinstance,removingthemodulefromtheworkareadeassignsthemodulefrom
allgroupsitiscurrentlyassigned.
142
Module Store/Recall
7.6
Module Store/Recall
TaptheModuleStore/Recallbuttontoviewasubmenucontainingfunctionsthatloadand
savemoduleandbaseconfigurations,andtostoreframepresets.Thebuttonbardisplaysthe
followingoptionsandascrollbarwithfilesandfolders.
FordetailedinformationonallofthemodulefiletypessupportedbytheDolbyLake
Controller,pleaserefertoSection3.7.
7.6.1
Recall/Open
Thisbuttonsfunctionandlabeldependsonwhetherafolderorfileisselected.Itisinactive
whenneitherafilenorfolderisselected,orwhenagroupiconisselectedintheworkarea.
ThebuttonislabeledOpenwhenafolderisselected.Toopenafolder,tapthedesiredfolder
icononthescrollbar,thentapOpen.
Note: Doubletappingafolderorfileiconalsoopensthefolderorfile.
ThebuttonislabeledRecallwhenafileisselected.Torecallamodulefile,tapthedesired
file,thentapRecall.ConfirmtheactionbytappingtheYesbuttoninthewarningmessage.
Note: Recallingamodulefileoverwritesalldatacurrentlystoredintheselectedmodule
andremovesthemodulefromanygroups.
143
7.6.2
Store
TheStorebuttonstoresoveranexistingfile.Thisbuttonisactiveonlywhenafileisselected.
1.
Tapanexistingfiletostoreover(overwrite).
2.
TapStore.
3.
Note: IftheselectedfileissettoReadOnly,thisfunctionisgray(inactive).
7.6.3
New Store
TheNewStorebuttonstoresthecurrentmoduleconfigurationunderanewfilename.
7.6.4
1.
Navigatethefilesystem,andtapthedesireddestinationfoldertoselectit.
2.
TapNewStore.
3.
Enterthefilename.
4.
TapOK.Thescrollbardisplaysthenewfile.
Base Configuration
Abaseconfigurationfiledefinesastartingpointforthemodulesetup.ItcontainsEQand
levelssettings,invisibletotheuser,whichrepresenttheappropriategeneralconfiguration
foraparticularspeakertype.
EQandlevelssettingsforanexistingmodule(andcrossoversettingsforContour)maybe
savedasabaseconfigurationforfutureusewhenconfiguringnewmodules.Asystem
designercanalsolockaccesstotheXoverscreen(Contour)orHPF/LPFscreen(MesaEQ)
withinthebaseconfigurationfile.Fordetailsonthisfunction,pleaserefertoChapter18.
TheRecall/Open,Store,andNewStorefunctionsoperateidenticallyasdescribedabove,but
theavailablefiles/foldersinthescrollbarchangewhenBaseConfigurationisselected.
Tostoreorrecallabaseconfigurationfile,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
Selectamoduleiconintheworkarea.
2.
TapModuleStore/RecallfromtheModulesmenu.
3.
TapBaseConfiguration.
4.
Navigatetothedesiredfolder/file.
5.
UsetheRecall/Store/NewStorefunctionsasrequired.
Note: Abaseconfigurationfilecannotbestoredfromavirtualframe.
144
Module Store/Recall
7.6.5
File Utilities
Thisbuttonprovidesasubmenucontainingfurtherfunctionsthatmanagefilesandfolders
fromwithintheDolbyLakeController.
Open
Thisbuttonisactiveonlywhenafolderisselected.TapOpentoopentheselectedfolder.
Read Only
Thisfunctionprotectsimportantfilesfrombeingaccidentallyoverwrittenordeletedandis
activeonlywhenafileisselected.Thecurrentlyselectedfilesstatusisidentifiedbythecolor
oftheReadOnlybutton:
OrangeTheselectedfileissettoReadOnly.
BlueTheselectedfileisnotsettoReadOnly.
TochangetheReadOnlystatusofafile:
1.
Tapafilefromthescrollbartoselectit.
2.
TapReadOnlytotogglefunctionon(orange)andoff(blue).
Rename
Thisbuttonallowsthenameofafile/foldertobechanged.
1.
Taptherequiredfile/folderfromthescrollbar,thentapRename.
2.
Enterthenewname,andtapOK.
Delete
Thisbuttonisactiveonlywhenafileorfolderisselected.Whenafileisselected,this
functionwillonlybeavailableifthefileisnotsettoReadOnly.Todeleteafileorfolder:
1.
Tapafileorfoldertoselectit,thentapDelete.
2.
ConfirmactionbytappingYesinthewarningmessage.
Note: DeletionofafileispermanentandcannotberestoredusingtheUndofunction.
145
New Folder
Thisbuttoncreatesanewfolderinthecurrentdirectory.
7.6.6
1.
Navigatetothedesireddirectorytolocatethenewfolder.
2.
TapNewFolder.
3.
Enterthefoldername,andtapOK.
Frame Presets
Amaximumof30frameconfigurationscanbestoredintheprocessor(amaximumof6are
availablefortheMesaEQandContourProcessors).Thesesettingscanbeactivatedinstantly
usingthefrontpanel,withouttheuseoftheDolbyLakeControllersoftware.
TheFramePresetsbuttonprovidesasubmenucontainingthefollowingfunctions:
Store
Thisbuttonisactiveonlywhenamoduleofanonlineframeisselectedandapresetlocation
isselectedthatisnotempty(suchaswhenoverwritinganexistingpreset).
Tooverwritethesettingsoftheframepreset:
1.
Loadorconfigurebothmodulesoftheframewiththerequiredsettings.
2.
Tapamoduleiconoftheframecontainingthedatayouwishtostore.
3.
TapFramePresetsfromtheModuleStore/Recallmenu.
4.
Selectapreviouslyusedpresetlocation,andtapStore.
Store with New Name

isselected.ThefunctionissimilartoStore,butalwaysprovidestheonscreenkeyboardfor
enteringapresetname.
Clear
containingdataisselected.
Todeletethedatainapresetlocation,performthefollowingsteps:
146
1.
Tapamoduleiconoftheframecontainingthepresetfordeletion.
2.
Selectthepresetlocationfromthescrollbar.
3.
TapClear,thenYestothewarningmessage.
Super Modules
7.7
Add Page
TheAddPagefunctionisalwaysavailablefromtheModulesmenuandcreatesadditional
pagesthathelpmanagelargesystemswithmanymoduleandgroupicons.
7.8
Super Modules
Supermodulesenabletheusertocontrolmodulesthatspanmultipleframesasasingle
entityintheuserinterface.Asupermodulecanbeacombinationoftwoormoreprocessing
modulesonthesameordifferentframesthatacttogethertoprovidethesameaudio
processingwithflexibleoutputrouting.
Note: Amaximumof100modulescanbeassignedtoasinglesupermodule.
7.8.1
Assigning Super Modules

1.
TapModules.
2.
Selectamodulefromthescrollingbar,anddragittothemainarea.
3.
TapSuperModulesfromtheModulesmenu.AVenniconthatrepresentsthe
combinationofmultiplemodulesappearsinthescrollingbar.
4.
DragtheVenniconinthemainarea.Theicondisplaysasasupermodulemarkedas
empty.
147
5.
Taptheemptysupermoduletoselectit.ThentapAssignModulefromtheModules
menu.Amessagedisplays,warningyouthatgroupassignmentsofthefirstmodule
assignedtoasupermodulewillberetainedandtransferredtosubsequentlyassigned
modules.
6.
Tapthemodulesyouwanttobepartofthesupermodule.Themodulesarethen
assignedtothesupermoduleandremovedfromthemainarea.Themodulescontained
inthesupermoduleappearinthescrollingbarwhenthesupermoduleisselected.
7.8.2
Super Module EQ/Levels or Module EQ/Levels

ThesefunctionsenableyoutovieworchangetheEQlevelsofamoduleorsupermodule.
Whenamoduleisselected,youchangeonlytheEQandlevelofthatmodule.Whenasuper
moduleisselected,youchangetheEQandlevelforallmodulescontainedinthatsuper
module.SeeChapter5formoreinformationonEQlevels.
ToviewtheEQlevelsofamoduleorsupermodule:
148
1.
Tapthemoduleorsupermoduletoselectit.
2.
TapSuperModEQ/LevelsorModuleEQ/Levels.APEQ1tabdisplaysequalizer
parametersandspecificlevels.ItalsocontainsaFrequencyLockbuttonandanA/B
button.
Super Modules
7.8.3
SM Routing: I/O Config

TheSMRoutingfunctiondisplaysthesupermoduleoutputroutingpopupwindow.It
showseachoftheelementalmodulescontainedinthesupermoduleanditsavailableoutput
routingoptions.
Torouteasupermodule:
1.
2.
SelectaSuperModuleinthemainarea.
3.
TapSMRouting.TheSuperModuleOutputRoutingscreenappears.
Note: I/OConfigisdisplayedwhenamoduleisselected.
TheexamplebelowshowsastereoClassic4Wayconfigurationsplitacrosstwo
Lab.gruppenPLMamplifiers.Thesubandlowchannelsarebeingdrivenbyoneamplifier,
andthemidandhighchannelsbyaseparateamplifier.
Withthissupermoduleconfiguration,two4wayspeakerscanbecontrolledsimultaneously
viaonesupermoduleicon,withallchangestolevels,EQandcrossoverbeingduplicatedin
realtimeacrossbothseparateamplifiers.
TheDestinationarrowicons
types.
enableyoutoscrollthroughthelistofavailableoutput
149
Themagnifyingglassicon
enablesyoutoretrievetheI/OConfigscreen.
SeeSection3.3.6fordetailsaboutthisscreen.
TheSMRoutingscreenisdividedintotwosections.Theleftsectioncontainsbuttonsthat
accessthesupermodulesettings.Therightsectiondisplaysoutputconfigurationinformation
foreachmodule.
7.8.4
Label Frame
Tolabelaframe,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
Selectamoduleofaframeineithertheworkareaorinthesupermodulescrollbarifa
supermoduleisselected(asshowninthefollowingscreenshot).
150
Super Modules
2. TapLabelFrame.Akeyboarddisplays.
3. Enterthename,andtapOK.Thelabeldisplaysintheframe.
151
7.8.5
Deassigning a Super Module

Todeassignasupermodule:
1.
Tapthesupermoduleyouwanttodeassign.Thescrollingbardisplaysthemodules
insidethesupermodule.
7.8.6
2.
TapDeAssignModule.
3.
Tapthemoduleiconsonthescrollbartoremovethemfromthesupermodule.
Remove Super Module

Toremoveasupermodule:
1.
Tapthesupermoduleyouwanttoremove.
2.
TapRemoveSuperMod.Amessageappears,warningyouthatremovingthesuper
modeldisassociatesitwithallthemodulescurrentlyassignedtoit.
3.
TapYestoproceed.Thesupermoduledisappears.
Note: Youcanalsoremoveasupermodulebyselectingitanddraggingitofftothe
scrollbar.
152
Chapter 8
Module File Types
TheDolbyLakeProcessorprovidestwodistinctcategoriesofcrossovers:ClassicBessel,
Butterworth,andLinkwitzRileycrossoversareavailablewithrolloffrangingfrom
6dB/octaveto48dB/octave.Additionally,theProcessorprovidesuniqueLinearPhaseBrick
Wallcrossoversprovidingzerophaseshiftwithsteeptransitionslopes.MesaEQTMmodule
filesroundoutProcessorfunctionality,providingfilesthatenablesystemequalizer
processing.
Signalprocessingcanbeconfiguredinvariouswaystomaximizetheuseoftheinputsand
outputs.AuxiliaryOutputsinitiallyprovidefullbandwidthsignal,whichcanbeconfigured
usingHPF/LPFfiltersandoutputspecificEQ.
ThischapterprovidesadetailedreferenceforalltheProcessormodulefiles.Defaultmodule
filesarelocatedintheDefaultModulesfolderandcanbeaccessedandrecalledutilizingthe
ModuleStore/Recallbuttonbar.
8.1
Module Type Abbreviations

Table81describestheModuleTypeabbreviationsasshownonthemoduleicon.
Module Type
Table 8-1 Module Type Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
1AuxiliaryOutput
Classic2WayCrossover
or
2AuxiliaryOutputs
2+1
Classic2WayCrossover+1AuxiliaryOutput
LP2
LinearPhase2WayCrossover+1AuxiliaryOutput
153
Module File Types
Abbreviation
Description
or
3AuxiliaryOutputs
3+1
Classic3WayCrossover+1AuxiliaryOutput
LP3
LinearPhase3WayCrossover
or
4AuxiliaryOutputs
LP4
LinearPhase4WayCrossover
or
5AuxiliaryOutputs
or
6AuxiliaryOutputs
Ins
StereoInsertmoduleprovidesStereoDigitalInput/OutputorStereo
AnalogInput/Output.AvailableonLakeContourTMPro26Donly.
8.2
Classic Crossovers/Auxiliary Outputs

ThissectiondescribestheavailablecombinationsofClassiccrossoversandshowsthedefault
signalpathforeachconfiguration.
Classic2+1,2Way,3Way,and3Auxiliarymodulesmaybeusedinanycombinationonthe
DolbyLakeProcessor.LinearPhase2Wayand3Waymodulesmayalsobeloadedinany
combinationwithClassiccrossovermodules.
Classic3+1,4Way,5Way,and6Waymodulesconsumemorethanonemodulesworthof
processing.Inmostcases,theremainingoutputsoftheProcessorcanbeconfiguredto
provideothercrossoversandauxiliaryoutputs.
154
8.2.1
Stereo Classic 2-Way (+ Auxiliary Outputs)

TheCL2w+1amoduleprovidesanauxiliaryoutputthatcanbedrivenbythepostinputEQ
signal,oritsownindependentinputmix.Bydefault,theauxiliaryoutputisdrivenbythe
postinputEQsignal.
Ifyouswitchtheauxiliarychanneltoreceiveinputfromitsowninputmixer,theauxiliary
channelwillnolongerbemutedbythemoduleinputmutecontrol.Theauxiliarychannel
canbemutedbythechannelsoutputmutecontrol.
Tochangetheauxiliaryoutputtoreceiveitsownindependentinputmix,taptheswitch
selectorboxlabeledPostEQ.
155
Module File Types
8.2.2
Classic 3-Way/3 Auxiliary Outputs
Thesignalpathsforboththesemoduleslooksimilar,buttheClassic3Way(shownin
moduleA)hasasinglecrossoverpageprovidingspecificfrequencybandsfromeachoutput.
The3AuxiliaryOutputsmoduleprovidesthreefullbandwidthchannelspermodule.Each
oftheseoutputscanbeconfiguredindependentlyasrequiredusingtraditionalhighpassand
lowpassfilters,whichareavailableoneachindependentAuxiliaryOutputpage.
Note: TheClassic2Way,Classic/LinearPhase2Way+1AuxiliaryOutput,Classic/Linear
Phase3Way,andClassic3AuxiliaryOutputsmodulescanbeusedinany
combinationonallavailablemodules.
8.2.3
Classic 3-Way + 1 Auxiliary Output (with Classic 2-Way/2-Aux)

TheClassic3Way+1AuxiliaryOutput(CL3w+1a)moduleallowstheremainingtwooutput
channelstobeconfiguredaseitherClassic2Wayor2AuxiliaryOutputs.
156
SeparateinputEQ(PEQ/GEQ)isavailablefortheCL3w+1aandthe2Way/2Auxmodules.
AswiththeClassic2way+1AuxiliaryOutputmodules,theAuxiliarychannelonthe
CL3w+1acanbefedPostInputEQ,orfromitsownindependentInputMixer.
8.2.4
Classic 4-Way/4-Aux (with Classic 2-Way/2-Aux)

TheClassic4Way(CL4way)or4AuxiliaryOutputs(4aux)modulesallowtheremainingtwo
outputchannelstobeconfiguredaseitherClassic2Wayor2AuxiliaryOutputs.
SeparateinputEQ(PEQ/GEQ)isavailablefortheClassic4Way/4Auxandthe2Way/2Aux
modules.
157
Module File Types
158
8.2.5
Classic 5-Way/5-Aux (with 1-Auxiliary Output)

TheClassic5Way(CL5way)or5AuxiliaryOutputs(5aux)moduleprovidesanauxiliary
channelonoutput6.
SeparateinputEQ(PEQ/GEQ)isavailablefortheClassic5Way/5Auxandthe1Auxiliary
(1aux)Outputmodules.
159
Module File Types
8.2.6
Classic 6-Way/6-Auxiliary Outputs

TheClassic6Way(CL6way)or6AuxiliaryOutputs(6aux)modulescanuseany
combinationofinputsignal,whichissplittoallsixoutputchannels.TheClassic6Wayis
shownhere:
8.3

Linearphasecrossoversprovidesteeptransitionslopeswithzerophaseshift.Linearphase
crossoversareavailableintwo,three,andfourwaymoduletypes.
160
8.3.1
Linear Phase Brick Wall 2-Way (+1 Classic Auxiliary Output)

TheLinearPhaseBrickWall2Way(LP2way)providesanauxiliarychannelwithtraditional
HPF/LPFforeachmodule(LP2w+1a).
TheLP2wayusessignificantprocessingpowertocreatethesteepcrossoverwithflatphase
response.Forthisreason,thefullamountofoutputspecificEQfilterscanbeusedonlyifthe
MaxPeakLimiterisdisabledonthemodule,astheMaxPeakLimiteralsorequiresalarge
amountofprocessing.
ThefollowingcrossoverEQfiltersfortheLP2way+1Auxareavailable:
MaxPeakActivated:
16EQFilters+HighpassFilter
MaxPeakDeactivated:
Note: TheClassic/LinearPhase2Way(+1Aux),Classic/LinearPhase3Way,and
Classic3AuxiliaryOutputsmodulescanbeusedinanycombinationonavailable
modules.
161
Module File Types
8.3.2
Linear Phase Brick Wall 3-Way

TheLinearPhaseBrickWall3Way(LP3way)hasasimilarsignalpathtotheClassic3Way
(CL3way).
AswiththeLP2way,theLP3wayusesasignificantamountofprocessingpowertocreate
steepcrossoverswithflatphaseresponse.Forthisreason,thefullamountofoutputspecific
EQfilterscanonlybeusediftheMaxPeakisdisabledonthemodule,astheMaxPeakLimiter
alsorequiresalargeamountofprocessing.
ThefollowingcrossoverEQfiltersfortheLP3wayareavailable:
MaxPeakActivated:
MaxPeakDeactivated:
Note: TheClassic/LinearPhase2Way(+1Aux),Classic/LinearPhase3Way,andClassic3
AuxiliaryOutputsmodulescanbeusedinanycombinationonmodulesAandB.
162
Mesa EQ Module
8.3.3
Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way

TheLinearPhaseBrickWall4Way(LP4way)usestheprocessingpoweroftwomodulesto
createextrasteepcrossovers.
163
Module File Types
8.4
Mesa EQ Module
TheMesaEQmoduletypeisabbreviatedasMEqonthemoduleicon.
ThedefaultsignalpathforaMesaEQmoduleisshowninthefollowingscreenshot:
TheMesaEQmoduleprovidesaneightchannelinputmixer,inadditiontotheothersignal
processingfunctionspreviouslydetailedinthischapter.Insteadofacrossoverdisplay,the
MesaEQhasanHPF/LPFdisplayforinsertingandconfiguringlowpassandhighpassfilters.
164
Chapter 9
Groups: Menu Reference
Groupsprovidepowerfulcontroloverallmodulesinasystem.Modulescanbeassignedto
multiplegroups,andeachmodulecanbeamemberofupto28differentgroups.
Groupsenableseveralimportantfunctions,includingthefollowing:
1.
MasterEQandLevelscontroloveranentiresystem
2.
EQandLevelscontroloversubsectionsofasystem(forexample,speakerclusters)
3.
HPF/LPF/Crossover/AuxiliaryOutputganging,allowingachangetoacrossoveror
outputspecificEQtobereflectedacrossallmodulesofthesametypewithinthegroup
4.
Simplifiedcontrolovermultiplespeakersorzones
Onceyourspeakersareconfigured,themodulesthatcontrolthedetailedindividualresponse
foreachspeakercanbeprotectedwiththeaccessprivilegesandsecurityprovidedby
DesignerMode,orplacedonaseparatepage,leavinggroupstosimplifytheoverallcontrol
oftheaudiosystem.
Youcanusemultiplegroupstologicallypartitionalargescaleloudspeakersystem.Group
allmodulesdrivingtheleftloudspeakerarraytocreatealeftsubmaster.Creategroupsfor
thecentercluster,therightloudspeakerarray,andanysidefill,downfill,frontfill,and
delaysystems.ThencreateasinglemastergrouptoenableasystemwideinterfaceforEQ
andLevels,makinginstantadjustmentstoallhardwareprocessorsonadistributednetwork
systemwithasingletap.
9.1
Adding a Group
TaptheGroupsbuttonfromtheHomemenu.Theavailablegroupiconsappearinthescroll
bar.Mostoptionsinthebuttonbarappeargrayandareinactiveuntilagroupismovedfrom
thescrollbartotheMainpage.
TheGroupsscrollbarandmenushowthestatusofdifferentgroupiconswhileonthescroll
bar.
165
Group1(empty)isbeingusedinthecurrentsystemconfiguration.
Group2(gray)isassignedtoamodulethatisnotapartofthecurrentsystem
configuration.
Groups3through28areavailableforuseandarenotcurrentlyassignedtoanyother
modules.
Tapanddragthescrollbartotheleft/rightortaptheXXorWWbuttonstoaccess
additionalgroupicons.
Toaddagrouptoyoursystemconfiguration,performthefollowingsteps:
9.2
1.
Tapagroupicononthescrollbar.Thecursorchangestothegroupicon.
2.
TaptheMainpagetoaddthegrouptoyoursystemconfiguration.
3.
FollowtheinstructionsinSection9.3toassignmodulestothegroup.
EQ/Levels
TaptheEQ/LevelsbuttonfromtheGroupsmenutodisplaytheparametricEQ,graphicEQ,
andLevelsscreensfortheselectedgroup.Thisfunctionisactiveonlywhenagroupis
selectedintheworkarea.
Modulelevellimitsarealwaysadheredtowhengrouplevelsarechanged.Ifonemodulein
thegroupwouldexceeditslevellimitasaresultofachangetogroupdata,thenthechange
willnotbeallowed.Thefollowingexampledemonstratestherelationshipbetweenmodule
levellimits,modulelevels,andgrouplevels.
Note: LevellimitscanbeadjustedinDesignerMode.
9.3
Assign
ChangesmadetothegroupEQ/Levelsaffectonlythosemodulesassignedtothatgroup.
Beforeassigningmodulestoagroup,makesuretherequiredmodulesandgroupsareinthe
workareaandnavigatetotheGroupsmenu.
Toassignmodulestoagroup,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TaptheAssignbuttontoactivatethefunction.
2.
Tapagroupicon.Theiconilluminatesyellow.
3.
Tapeachmoduleiconyouwishtoassigntothatgroup.Eachmoduleiconsborder
illuminatesyellowindicatingitisassignedtotheselectedgroup.
4.
TaptheAssignbuttonagaintodeactivatethefunction.
Modulegroupassignmentscanbeverifiedbyselectingagroupiconintheworkarea.The
selectedgroupandassociatedmoduleiconswilldisplayyellowborders.
166
Copy/Paste
Note: Moduleswillnotallowanygroup,oranycombinationofgroups,toexceedits
minimumormaximumlimits.Warningmessageswillbedisplayedifagroup
assignmentwouldcausethemoduletoexceeditslevellimits.
Thefirstmodulethatisassignedtothegroupwillbeusedbythegroupforlevel
meteringpurposes.Thismeteringassignmentcanbechangedatalaterstageif
required;pleaserefertoSection5.2.8forfurtherdetailsontheAssignMeters
function.
9.4
Label
Thegrouplabelisauserdefinedvalueatthebottomofthegroupiconthatisusefulfor
identifyingthepartofthesoundsystemtowhichthegroupcommunicates(frontofhouse,
monitors,downfill,andsoon).
Tolabelagroup,performthefollowingsteps:
9.5
1.
Tapthedesiredgroupicon.
2.
TapLabelandenteragrouplabel.
3.
TapOK.
Copy/Paste
SelectagroupfromtheMainpage,andtaptheCopy/Pastebuttontoviewasubmenuthat
transfersattributesbetweengroups.
9.5.1
Copy
TheCopybuttonisactiveonlywhenagroupiconisselected.
Tocopydatafromagroup,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
Tapthegroupiconthatcontainsthedatatocopy.
2.
TapCopy.
167
9.5.2
Paste
ThePastebuttonisactiveonlywhengroupdatahasbeenpreviouslycopiedandagroup
iconisselected.
Topastedatatoagroup,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
Tapthegroupiconinwhichtopastethecopieddata.
2.
TapPaste.
Note: ThePasteoperationoverwritesallthedestinationgroupsEQandLevelssettings,
butnotthenameormoduleassignments.
9.6
Remove
Thisfunctionremovestheselectedgroupfromthecurrentsystemconfiguration.
Toremoveagroup,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
Tapthegroupicontoberemoved.
2.
TapRemove.
3.
ConfirmtheactionbyselectingYesinthewarningmessage.
Thewarningmessageisdisplayedonlyifthegrouphasmodulesassignedtoit.Thegroup
iconreappearsinthescrollbarindicatingitisnotcurrentlyused.
Note: Youcanalsoremoveagroupfromtheconfigurationandreleaseitsmodulesby
draggingthegroupicontothescrollbar.
9.7
Gang
Tappingthisbuttonactivatesascrollbarcontainingallmodulescurrentlyassignedtothe
selectedgroup,alongwithasubmenu.
168
Add Page
Gang Xover/Aux (Contour) or Gang HPF/LPF (Mesa EQ)

Thisfunctionallowsthecrossovers,auxiliaryoutputchannels,andHPF/LPFsettingsof
modulesondifferentframestobelinkedtogether.WhenGangXover/Auxisactiveona
groupcontainingcrossovermodules,thecrossovers,HPF/LPF,andauxiliarychannelsofall
modulesinthegrouparesynchronized;achangemadeinonemodulewillbereflectedinall
modulesofthatgroup.WhenGangHPF/LPFisactiveonagroupcontainingMesaEQTM
modules,theHPF/LPFwillbelinkedonallmodulesinthegroup.
Togangthecrossover(orHPF/LPF)ofallmodulesinagroup,performthefollowingsteps:
1. Assignthemodulestoagroup.Allmodulesmustbeofthesamecrossovertype,suchas
Classic3Way(CL3way),forexample.
2. FromtheGroupsmenu,tapGang.
3. Tapthemoduleonthescrollbartoselectwhichmodulessettingswillbetransferredto
allothermodulesinthegroup.
4. TapGangXover/Aux(crossovermodules)orGangHPF/LPF(MesaEQmodules).
5. TapYestofinish.
Note: Onlythecrossover/aux/HPF/LPF/outputEQdataareganged.Levelsdataandinput
EQ(PEQ/GEQ)arenotganged.PleaseusetheGroupfunctionformasterlevelsand
EQcontrolacrossmultiplemodules.
Tosynchronizealldataacrossmultiplemodules,youcanusethepowerfulsuper
modulefeature.SeeSection7.8fordetails.
9.8
Add Page
TheAddPagefunctionisalwaysavailablefromtheGroupsmenuandcreatesadditional
pagesthathelpmanagelargesystemswithmanymoduleandgroupicons.
169
Chapter 10
Solo/MuteMenu
Reference
ThefunctionalityprovidedbytheSolo/Mutemenuprovidesaninvaluabletoolforthesound
engineerduringsystemsetupandoptimization.TheSolofunctionallowsyoutochoosea
specificmoduleorgroupandinstantlymutetherestofthesystem.Thisallowsforrapid
measurementandanalysis,includinglobestudiesinlarge,complexsystems.
TaptheSolo/MutebuttonfromtheHomemenu.ThisactiondisplaysasubmenuwithMute
andSolofunctionsformodulesandgroups.
10.1
EQ/Levels
TaptheEQ/LevelsbuttonfromtheSolo/MutemenutodisplaytheparametricEQ,graphic
EQ,Xover,andLevelsscreensfortheselectedmoduleorgroup.Thisfunctionisactiveonly
whenamoduleorgroupiconhasbeenselected.
Note: WhenSolo/Muteisenabled,EQ/Levelscanonlybeaccessedforamodulethatisin
Solomode.
TheabilitytoaccessEQ/LevelsfromtheSolo/Mutebuttonbarisnecessarybecausethe
DolbyLakeControllerwillexitSolo/Mutemodewhenyounavigatetootherareasofthe
userinterface.Thisisasafetyfeaturetoensurethatnomodulesorgroupsareleft
accidentallymuted.
Additionally,contextswitchingisalsodisabledtoensurethatnomodulesorgroupsareleft
accidentallymuted.
10.2
Solo/Mute Enable
TaptheSolo/MuteEnablebuttontotoggletheSolo/Mutefunctionalityon(orange)andoff
(blue).WhiletheSolo/Mutefunctionison,iconsareredwhenmutedorgreenwheninSolo
mode.AllmodulesdefaulttoSolomodewhenSolo/Muteisfirstturnedon.
TapamoduleorgroupicontokeepSolomodeactiveonthatmodule(orallmodulesinthe
selectedgroup)andmuteallothermodulesinthesystem.Tapthesameiconagainto
unmuteallmodules.
171
Solo/MuteMenu Reference
ThefollowingfigureshowsmoduleBofaframeinSolomode.Theothertwomoduleicons
aremutedthroughtheSolo/Mutefunction.
10.3
Pile
ThePilefunctionallowsformultiplemodulesorgroupstosoloatthesametime.
10.4
1.
TaptheSolo/MuteEnablebuttonfromtheSolo/Mutemenu.Thebuttonilluminates
orange.
2.
TapthePilebutton.Thebuttonilluminatesorange.
3.
TapaModuleorGroupicontosolo.Repeatforothermodulesorgroupstosolo.
4.
TapSolo/MuteEnableagaintoexitthisfunction.
All Mute
Tomuteallmodulesinasystem,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TapSolo/MuteEnablefromtheSolo/Mutemenu.Thebuttonilluminatesorange.
2.
TaptheAllMutebutton.
3.
TapSolo/MuteEnableorSolo/MuteExittoresumenormalstatus.
172
Chapter 11
Icon ControlMenu
Reference
ThefunctionalityprovidedthroughtheIconControlmenuallowsyoutoconfigurethesize
oficonsdisplayedonpages,andcanalsochangeiconstoshowinputandoutputmeters.You
canconfigurepagestoprovideanoverviewofallmodulesonthenetwork,providinga
systemmonitoringinterfaceincludingbothlevelandlimitingactivity.
11.1
Meters On/Off
Thisfeatureisactiveformodulesandgroupswhenaniconisselected.Metersontheicon
displayinputandoutputlevels,limiting,clipping,andthemodulelabel.
Totogglemetersonandoff:
1. TapIconControlfromtheHomemenu.
2. TapMetersOn/Off.Thebuttonilluminatesorange.
3. TapthemoduleorgroupicontotogglebetweenMetersOn/Off.
4. TapMetersOn/Offagaintoexitthismode.
TheIconSmall,IconNormal,IconMedium,andIconLargebuttonsdescribednextare
activeonlywhenamoduleorgroupiconisselectedfromthemainworkareaandtheMeters
On/Offmodeisnotselected.(TheMetersOn/Offbuttonisblue.)
173
Icon ControlMenu Reference
11.2
Icon Small/Normal/Medium/Large
Taptheiconsizebuttonstochangethesizeoftheselectedmoduleorgroupicon.
Thefouriconsizesareshowninthefollowingscreenshot.
174
Chapter 12
User PreferencesMenu
Reference
TheUserPreferencesmenuprovidesanumberoffunctionsforcustomizingtheDolby
LakeControllertosuityourparticularapplicationrequirements.
TaptheUserPreferencesbuttonfromtheHomemenutodisplayasubmenucontaining
functionsandvariousadditionalmenus.UserPreferencesfunctionschangesettings
throughoutthesystem.
12.1
Contexts
ContextsallowuptoeightviewstobestoredandretrievedeasilyusingtheContextbutton,
whichisavailableonthefarleftofthebuttonbaronmostscreens.
TheContextmenuenablesselectionofthenumberofviewstobeavailablethroughoutthe
system,alongwiththeabilitytodisabletheanimationofthescrollbarwhencontextisbeing
changed.
Tosetupfourcontextsinyoursystem,performthefollowingsteps:
1. FromHome,tapUserPreferences.
2. TapContext,thentap4.
3. TapHome.
4. Navigatetothefirstscreenyouwishtoview.
5. Tapanumberedcontextbutton(labeledAinthefigureabove)tomovetothenext
context.
6. Repeatsteps4and5untilallfourcontextsareconfigured.
TappingtheContextbuttonnowallowsyoutoswitchinstantlybetweentheseviews.
Note: Thelastscreenviewedisstoredunderthecurrentlyselectedcontext.
175
User PreferencesMenu Reference
12.2
Delay Units
Theunitsusedforsettingdelaylevelsdefaultstomilliseconds.
Thismenuprovidestheoptionforvaluestobeenteredandviewedinfeetandmeters.Tap
therelevantbuttontochangetoyourrequireddefaultsetting.
Delaycalculationsinmetersandinfeetareperformedwiththespeedofsoundbeing343.6
meterspersecond.Thisisthespeedofsoundascalculatedforanambienttemperatureof20
degreesCelsius.
12.3
Designer Functions
DesignerfunctionsprovideagatewaytoDesignerMode,anadvancedmodeoftheDolby
LakeControllerthatprovidestheengineerwiththeabilitytosecurevariousaspectsofthe
userinterface.
12.3.1
Change Password
TheChangePasswordfunctionisactiveonlywhenDesignerModeison.Itallowsasystem
designertopasswordprotectaccesstoDesignerMode.
12.3.2
Designer Mode
TaptheDesignerModebuttontotoggleDesignerModeon(orange)andoff(blue).With
DesignerModeon,theusercanaccessandadjustadditionalfunctionsthroughoutthe
system,includingthefollowing:
GlobalandIndividualOverlayaccesssecuritysettings
CrossoverandHPF/LPFaccesssecuritysettings
Hiddenchannels
FactorysettingsandLevelLimits
WhenDesignerModeisactive,thetextDesignerModeisdisplayedonthestatusbarofthe
Controller.
176
Graphics
12.3.3
Global Access
TheGlobalAccessfunctionisactiveonlywhenDesignerModeison.Itallowsasystem
designertohideorsettoViewOnlyentiresectionsofthesystem.Moredetailisprovidedin
Chapter18.
12.4
Keyboard Shortcuts
TheKeyboardShortcutsbuttonenables(orange)ordisables(blue)keyboardshortcut
functionality.Fordetailsonallavailablekeyboardshortcuts,pleaserefertoChapter16.
12.5
MIDI
TheMIDIbuttondisplaysasubmenuwithascrollbarcontainingallavailableMIDIdevices
onyourcomputer.ToselectorchangetheMIDIdeviceyouwishtouse,taptheMIDIdevice
icononthescrollbar,andthentaptheSelectMIDIDevicebutton.
PleaserefertoSection17.2fordetailsregardingMIDIcontrol.
12.6
About
TaptheAboutbuttontoviewthecurrentDolbyLakeControllersoftwareversion.Tap
anywhereonthedisplaytoclosetheAboutbox.
12.7
Graphics
12.7.1
Auto Icon Arrange

Thisbuttonisonbydefault,automaticallyplacingiconssotheydonotoverlapeachother.
177
User PreferencesMenu Reference
12.7.2
Screen Capture
ThisbuttonturnstheUndobuttonintoascreencapturebutton,whichstoresabitmapofany
screeninthesystemtothedata/user/printoutfolderinyourDolbyLakeController
installationdirectory.
12.7.3
Animate
Thisbuttonisonbydefault,enablingvariousanimationandgraphiceffectsduringuseofthe
DolbyLakeController.Forslowercomputers,werecommenddisablingthisfeature.
12.7.4
Daylight Mode
DaylightModeprovideshighcontrastgraphicsonawhitebackground,makingthe
Controllereasiertoviewunderdaylightconditions.
Figure 12-1 Controller in Daylight Mode
TaptheDaylightModebuttontotogglebetweennormalgraphicssettings(black
background)andDaylightmode(whitebackground).
178
Show Mode
12.8
Show Mode
TaptheShowModebuttontotoggleShowModeon(orange)andoff(blue).ShowMode
shouldbeactivatedduringashowtopreventaccidentalchanges.
WhenShowModeison:
ChannelmuteandpolaritybuttonsaredisabledonallLevelsscreens.
InputMixerandInputMutecontrolsaredisabled.
AllchangestoEQandLevelsarerestrictedtofineadjustments.
AllXoverscreensbecomeunavailable.
AllHomelevelmenuoptionsaredisabledexceptUserPreferencesandNetwork.
179
Chapter 13
Pages: Menu Reference
TapthePagesbuttonfromtheHomemenutodisplayasubmenuwithfunctionsthat
managetheMainworkareaofthesystem,alongwiththemoduleandgroupicons.The
defaultsystemsettingisonepagelabeledMain.Largesystemswithmanymodulesand
groupsmayrequireadditionalpages.
Thefunctionsdescribedinthischaptermaybeusedtomanagepagesandcopyormove
iconsacrossthepages.Thefollowingexampleshowsaconfigurationcontainingthreepages:
onecontaininggroupsformainfrontofhouseEQandLevels,anotherformonitorEQand
Levels,andanothertostoreallthemoduleicons.
180
Page Label
13.1
Cut Icon
TheCutIconbuttonisactiveonlywhenamoduleorgroupiconisselected.
Tomoveaniconfromonepagetoanother,performthefollowingsteps:
13.2
1.
Tapamoduleorgroupiconontheworkarea.
2.
TapCutIcon.
3.
Selectanotherpageusingthetabsattopofthescreen,ortapAddPageifnootherpages
exist.
4.
TapPasteIcon.
Copy Icon
TheCopyIconbuttonisactiveonlywhenamoduleorgroupiconisselected.Morethanone
copyofaniconcanexistondifferentpages.
Tocopyanicon,performthefollowingsteps:
1. Tapamoduleorgroupiconontheworkarea.
2. TapCopyIcon.
3. Selectanotherpageusingthetabsattopofscreen,ortapAddPageifnootherpages
exists.
4. TapPasteIcon.
Note: Therecanbeonlyonecopyofanicononeachpage.
13.3
Paste Icon
ThePasteIconbuttonisactiveonlyafteraCutIconorCopyIconaction.Whentapped,this
buttonwillpasteacopyoftheiconcurrentlyinmemorytothecurrentlyselectedpage.
13.4
Page Label
ThePageLabelbuttonisalwaysactive.
Tolabelapage,performthefollowingsteps:
1. Selectthepagetobelabeled(topofscreen).
2. TapPageLabel.
3. Enterthelabelusingeithertheonscreenkeyboardoranexternalkeyboard.
4. TapOK.
181
Pages: Menu Reference
13.5
Page Delete
Thisfunctiondeletestheselectedpage,includingallmoduleandgroupicons,whichreturn
tothemoduleandgroupscrollbars.
Note: ThePageDeletebuttonisinactiveiftheMainpageortheAllpageisselected.
13.6
Page Add
TaptheAddPagebuttontoaddanotherpagetotheDolbyLakeControllerinterface.
13.7
Page Hide
ThisbuttonisactiveonlyinDesignerModeandisusedforhidingpages.Forfurther
information,pleaserefertoChapter18.
13.8
Scrolling Pages
TheWWandXXbuttonsonthebuttonbaractivateiftherearemorepagesthancanfitacross
thescreen.Tapthesebuttonstoviewpagesthatarecurrentlyoutofview.
182
Chapter 14
NetworkMenu Reference
TheNetworkmenuprovidesfunctionalityforchangingthecurrentlyselectednetwork,and
alsoprovidestheinterfaceforenablingmultipleControllers.MultipleControllersallowsfor
multiplecomputersoperatingonthesamenetworkofDolbyLakeProcessors,Lake
ContourTM,andLakeMesaQuadEQTMhardwareprocessors.
14.1
Network
TapNetworktodisplaythenetworkadaptersusedtoconnecttheDolbyLakeControllerto
thenetwork.Thisfeaturecanbeusedtoswitchbetweennetworkadaptersortoworkoffline.
1.
FromHome,tapNetwork.
2.
Taptherequirednetworkconnectiononthescrollbar.
3.
TapSelectNetwork,andthentapYestothewarningmessage.
IftherearemultipleadaptersavailabletotheController,anyadaptersthatarenotthe
currentlyselectedadaptermaybedisabledtoavoidcommunicationerrors.
Todisableanadapter,tapthedesirednetworkadapterinthescrollbarandthentap
DisableNetwork.
Toreenableanadapter,taponthedesirednetworkadapterandthentapEnable
Network.
Toupdateinformationaboutanadapter,tapthedesirednetworkadapterandthentap
RefreshNetwork.
ToenablemultipleControllerstobeconnectedtothesamenetwork,tapthedesired
networkadapterandthentapMultipleControllers.TheMultipleControllersmenu
buttonsdisplay.SeeSection14.2fordetailsoneachMultipleControllersmenubutton.
183
Note: TheDolbyLakeControllerdisablesunusednetworkadapterswhenever
communicationerrorsoccur.Anyadaptersthathavebeendisabledautomatically
willbeenabledwhentheControllerhasexited,orwhenitisminimized.
14.2
Multiple Controllers
14.2.1
Overview and Menu Options

TheDolbyLakeControllersystemallowsmultipleControllerstobeconnectedtothesame
network.Wheninthismode,certainfunctionalityisrestricted.
ThefirstControllertoconnecttoanetworkiscalledtheprimaryController.Anysubsequent
Controllersarereferredtoassecondary.
TheoptionsshowninTable141areavailableontheMultipleControllerssubmenu.
Table 14-1 Multiple Controllers Options
Button
MultiCont
Enable
Function
ThisbuttonisavailableonlyontheprimaryControllerandisdisabled(gray)on
anysecondaryControllers.
Whenthisbuttonisactive(orange),multipleControllersareallowedonthesame
network.
Whenthebuttonisinactive(blue),onlyoneControllerisallowedonthenetwork.
ThisbuttonisavailableonlyontheprimaryControllerandisdisabled(gray)on
anysecondaryControllers.
Confirmation
Required
Whenthisbuttonisactive(orange),aconfirmationdialogboxisdisplayedonthe
primaryControllerwhenasecondaryControllerattemptstoconnect.
Ifthisbuttonisinactive(blue),thenadditionalControllersareabletoconnectto
thenetworkwithoutprimaryControllerapproval.
Thisbuttonprovidestheoptiontodisableanalyzerdataonapercontrollerbasis
(usefulwhenusingmultiplecontrollers).
AnalyzerEnable
Ifthisbuttonisactive(orange),analyzerdatawillbedisplayedonthisController.
Ifthisbuttonisinactive(blue),analyzerdatawillnotbedisplayed.
Thisbuttonisdisabled(gray)iftheanalyzerorAnalyzerBridgeisnotavailable.
184
Multiple Controllers
14.2.2
Primary and Secondary Controllers

TheprimaryDolbyLakeControllercommunicateswiththenetworkofprocessors,andalso
withsecondaryControllers.ThesecondaryControllerscommunicateonlyviatheprimary
Controller.
TheprimaryControllercanbeusedineitherDesignerorUserMode(inwhichmany
DesignerModefunctionswillberestricted).SecondaryControllersarealwaysrestrictedto
UserModeoperation.
TheprimaryControllermusthaveaconnectiontothenetworkforsecondaryControllersto
function.
IfcommunicationislostbetweentheprimaryControllerandthenetwork,allsecondary
Controllersaresuspendedwithawarningmessagedisplayeduntilthenetworkconnection
returns.
IftheprimaryControllerisrestarted,allsecondaryControllersmustalsoberestarted.
IftheControllersbecomeoutofsyncwiththenetwork,theprimaryControllermustbeused
tosynchronizethenetwork.
InamultipleControllerenvironment,itisrecommendedthattheprimaryControlleriseither
wiredtothenetworkorkeptwithinrangeofthewirelesstransmittertoensurethatall
Controllerscanfunctionwithoutinterruption.
Note: WhenusingmultipleControllers,eachControllermusthaveauniqueIPaddress.
14.2.3
Restricted Functionality
VarioussystemfunctionsarerestrictedwhenMultipleControllersmodeisactive.The
followingfigureshowsthefunctionsavailableontheHomemenuwhileinMultiple
Controllersmode.Themenubuttonsshowningrayareunavailable.
NotethePrimarylabelonthefarrightofthehelptext,abovetheUndobutton.Thisidentifies
theControllerstatus,andwillreadSecondaryforallsecondaryControllers.
SystemRecallandSystemPresetsaredisabledontheSystemStore/Recallmenu.Boththe
primaryandsecondaryControllerscanstoresystemfileswhileinMultipleControllersmode.
CertainfunctionsontheEQ/Levels/CrossoverscreensarealsorestrictedwhenusingMultiple
Controllersmode.Anyunavailablefunctionisidentifiedbyagraybutton.
185
Torestorefullfunctionality,theprimaryControllerhastheabilitytodisableMultiple
ControllersmodeusingtheMultiContEnablebutton.DisablingMultipleControllersmode
disconnectsallsecondaryControllers.TheprimaryControllercanreenableMultiple
ControllersmodeinthesamesessionandthesecondaryControllerswillautomatically
reconnect.
Note: IfMultipleControllersmodeisdisabledandthenrestoredbytheprimaryController,
thesystemconfigurationwillbecompletelyrefreshedonallsecondaryControllersto
ensuredataissynchronized.
14.2.4
Using the Analyzer Bridge with Multiple Dolby Lake Controllers

IfanapprovedanalyzerandtheAnalyzerBridgeareavailableonthenetwork,Analyzerdata
willbetransmittedanddisplayedonallControllersthathavetheAnalyzerEnablebutton
activated.
EachControllerhastheabilitytodisabletheanalyzerindependently.OneControllercan
viewanalyzerdatawhileotherControllerscontinueworkingwithouttheanalyzerdata
beingdisplayed.
Toenable/disableanalyzerdataonaController,performthefollowingsteps:
1. FromHome,tapNetwork,thenMultipleControllers.
2. ToggletheAnalyzerEnablebutton(orangeequalsenabled;blueequalsdisabled).
14.3
Working Offline
WorkingofflineenablestheDolbyLakeControllertobeusedevenifanetworkisnot
enabledorpresent.Thisallowsofflinesetupofsystemconfigurations.
Therefore,systemscanbecreatedormodifiedwhenanetworkofDolbyLakeProcessorsare
notavailable.Toworkoffline,starttheControllerwithoutanetworkadapterenabled,or
selectOfflineduringinitialnetworkselectiononstartup,ortaptheNetworkbuttoninthe
NetworkbuttonbarandselectthenetworkcardgraphiclabeledOfflinefromthescrollbar.
Alargemajorityoffunctionscanbeusedwhenoffline,althoughsomehardwarespecific
configurationfunctionsarenotaccessible.
Note: Ifanexistingsystemconfigurationhasbeenmodifiedandstoredwhileoffline,the
newvalueswilltakeeffectwhenthesystemconfigurationisrecalledwithanonline
networkorprocessors.
186
Working Offline
14.3.1
Virtual Frames
Virtualframescanbeusedwhileworkingoffline.Avirtualframeprovidesthesame
functionsasonlinemodules;theycanbeloadedwithmodulefiles,copiedandpasted,and
storedasmodulefilesoraspartofasystemconfiguration.
Themodulescrollbaralwayscontainsthefollowingvirtualframeconfigurationsthat
representtheavailableprocessorrange.
Tousevirtualframes,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
Tapthevirtualframeiconthatyourequire.Thecursorwillrepresenttherelevant
numberofmoduleicons.
2.
Placethevirtualframeintheworkarea.Themajorityoffunctionsareavailable,enabling
fullofflineconfiguration.
Virtualframesdonothaveanassociatedhardwareprocessoridentifier,andthereforea
replacefunctionisusedtoassignthemoduletoarealhardwareProcessor.
SeeSection3.3fordetailsaboutContourandMesamodules.
14.3.2
Virtual Frames I/O Card Configuration

ThisfunctionenablestheusertocreateavirtualDolbyLakeProcessorthathasthedesired
inputandoutputcards.Userscancreateavirtualsystemwithallinputandoutput
assignments,andthenuserealDolbyLakeProcessors(thathavethesameI/Osettings)for
theshow.
Thefollowingscreencontainstwosections.Theuppersectiondisplaysadiagramofthe
input/outputcardconfigurationonaDolbyLakeProcessor.Thelowersectionconsistsofa
scrollingbarthatcontainsanaloginput,analogoutput,andCobraNetinput/outputcards.
Youcandraganinput/outputcardtotheDolbyLakeProcessor.
187
14.3.3
Replacing Virtual Frames with an Online Processor

TheModuleStore/RecallorCopy/Paste/Replacefunctionscanbeusedtotransferthedata
fromavirtualframetoanonlineframe.
Individualmodulescreatedofflinecanbestoredasmodulefilesandrecalledintoanonline
Processor.
Offlinesystemconfigurationscanbestoredandrecalled,andtheneachframecanbe
replacedwithanonlineProcessor.
PleaserefertoSection7.4.3fordetailedinformationontheReplaceFramefunctionality.
188
Chapter 15
Communication and
Synchronization
TheDolbyLakeControllerandhardwareprocessorscommunicateviaanEthernet
network.AllupdatesmadeusingtheControlleraretransmittedinrealtimetothenetworkof
DolbyLakeProcessors.BoththeControllerandProcessorsstoreallrequiredinformation,
whichresultsintwocopiesofthedataforeachmodule:
AcopystoredintheControllersoftware
AcopystoredintheProcessorhardware
Thisdataredundancyensuresanextremelyhighlevelofconfidenceincommunicatingover
anEthernetnetworkthatcanbesubjectedtoothernetworktraffic,aswellasinterferenceor
lostdatapacketsduetoanoisytransportsuchaswirelessEthernetconfigurations.
Ifthereiseveradiscrepancyfoundbetweenthesetwodatarecords,theController
immediatelynotifiestheuserthatthetwodatarecordsareoutofsync,andprovidesachoice
tocontinueusingthesettingsonthehardwareprocessorortousethesettingsinthe
Controllersoftware.Discrepanciesaretypicallycausedbymakingadjustmentstoahardware
processorviathefrontpanelinterfacewhiletheControllerisdisconnectedtemporarily.
Thischapterprovidesusefulterminologydefinitionsandreferenceinformationfordealing
withcommunicationandsynchronizationissues.
15.1
Offline Modules
Amodulethatcannotbefoundonthenetworkisreferredtoasoffline.Thiscanoccurforthe
followingreasons:
Theprocessoristurnedoff.
Theprocessorisnotconnectedtothenetwork.
Thewirelesstransmitterisoutofrangeorturnedoff.
Faultynetworkcablingorhardware.
Virtualframesalwaysshowofflinebecausetheyhavenotbeenassignedtoahardware
Processor,andthereforeexistonlyinthecomputersdatarecord.
189
Communication and Synchronization
15.2
Communication/Network Errors
TheDolbyLakeControllerdisplayscommunicationornetworkproblemshighlightedinred
atthebottomrightofthescreen:
Communication Error/Network Error/All Offline
Ifaproblempersists,theaffectedmodulesbecomeofflineasdescribedpreviously.Torectify
thesituation,checkallnetworkconnections.Ifusingawirelessaccesspoint,makesurethe
computeriswithinrange.
15.3
Synchronization
ThissectiondescribesthevarioussynchronizationprocessesbetweentheDolbyLake
ControllersoftwareandtheDolbyLakeProcessors.
15.3.1
Resync Process
TheResyncprocessensuresthattheDolbyLakeControllersoftwareandDolbyLake
Processorsaresynchronized,orthattheoperatorisinformedofdifferencesbetweenthetwo
copiesofdata.
TheResyncprocesscomparesthedataintheControllersoftwarewiththatstoredinthe
Processors.Ifdifferencesarefound,theControllersoftwareinformstheuserthatmodules
areoutofsync.
Aresyncoccurswhen:
190
Asystemconfigurationfileisrecalled
Anofflinemodulebecomesonline
Anetworkorcommunicationerroroccurs
Synchronization
TheControlleradvisesthatsynchronizationisoccurringbydisplayingthemessageinthe
followingscreenshot.
15.3.2
Out of Sync
TheDolbyLakeControllerandDolbyLakeProcessorscouldbecomeoutofsyncforthe
followingreasons:
AnupdatewasmadeusingtheControllersoftwarewhileaunitwasoffline.
Acommunicationornetworkerroroccurredduringanupdate.
Whentheaffectedmodulesreturnonline,theControllercomparesitsdatawiththe
Processorsdata.Ifdifferencesarefound,theControllerhighlightswhichmodulesareoutof
sync.
Note: AnyaffectedmodulesorrelatedgroupsaresettoViewOnly.Nofurtherchangescan
bemadeuntilthecomputerandprocessorsaresynchronized.Audiowillnotbe
affectedunlesstheUseComputerSettingsoptionisselected.
191
Figure 15-1 Out of Sync Notifications
Table151definesthenotificationslabeledinFigure151.
Table 15-1 Out of Sync Notifications
15.3.3
Callout
Explanation
Areddiscbehindthemoduleiconindicatesthatthemoduleisoutofsync.
FlashingUsedataonProcessorsbutton.
FlashingUsedatainComputerbutton.
Awarningmessageappearsthatisvisiblefromanyscreeninthesystem.
Updating All Processors with Computer Settings

ToupdateallDolbyLakeProcessorswiththeinformationstoredinthecomputer,perform
thefollowingsteps:
1. FromtheHomemenu,taptheflashingUsedatainComputerbutton.
2. TapYesonthewarningmessagetoconfirmtheaction.
Note: Thisoptionmayresultinanaudibleeffect,asthedataintheProcessorswillbe
overwrittenwiththedatastoredinthecomputer.
192
Synchronization
15.3.4
Updating the Controller with Processor Settings

ToupdatetheDolbyLakeControllerwiththeinformationstoredintheDolbyLake
Processors,performthefollowingsteps:
1. FromtheHomemenu,taptheflashingUsedataonProcessorsbutton.
2. TapYesonthewarningmessagetoconfirmtheaction.
Note: Audiowillnotchangeifthisoptionisselected.
15.3.5
Synchronizing the Dolby Lake Controller and Processors

Inthefollowingexample,themodulebecameoutofsyncduetoapowerinterruptiononthe
processorwhilethePEQ1overlaywasbeingupdatedusingtheController.Figure152shows
anexampleoftheControllerSettingsview,alongwithlettersmarkingimportant
information.
Figure 15-2 Controller Settings on a PEQ1 Screen
Table152definesthefunctionslabeledinFigure152..
193
Table 15-2 Controller Settings
Callout
Explanation
AnoutofsyncmoduleissettoViewOnly.Nochangescanbemadeuntilthemoduleis
synchronized.
ComputerFrame/modulenamehighlightedinredasoffline
Thesettingscurrentlyviewedareidentifiedhere:
ProcessorFrame/modulenamedisplayedinbluetextasonline
Themainpartofthescreenchangestoshowthecomputerandprocessorsettingsasselected.
Thehelptextshownhereindicatesthetypeofdatathatisoutofsync.Navigatetotherelevant
sectionofthesystemtoview/update.
TheOutofSyncwarningmessageisvisibleonallscreens.
Thisbuttonchangeslabelsdependingonthecurrentlyselectedview.
ShowProcessorWhenviewingthecomputersettings
ShowComputerWhenviewingtheprocessorsettings
Tappingthisbuttonupdateseitherthecomputerorprocessorwiththesettingscurrentlybeing
viewed.
TocompareandupdatesettingsstoredintheDolbyLakeControllersoftwareandDolby
LakeProcessorsonthenetwork,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
FromtheHomemenu,tapamoduleiconthatisoutofsync.Anoutofsyncmoduleis
indicatedbyareddiscbehindthenormalmoduleicon.
2.
Viewthehelptext(D)thatadviseswhichparametersareaffected.
3.
NavigatetotherelevantEQ/Levelspage.Computersettingsaredisplayedbydefault.
4.
TapShowProcessor/ShowComputer(F)tocomparesettings.
5.
Decidewhichsettingstouse,andtapUseTheseSettings.
6.
Repeattheprocessforeachoutofsyncmodule.
Alternately,allmodulescanbeupdatedwiththeUseDatainComputerorUseDataon
Processorfunctions.
15.3.6
Audible Changes when Synchronizing

Ifamodulebecomesoutofsyncwhileaudioisbeingprocessed,choosingtosynchronize
withtheControllercouldaffectthesound(dependingonthevaluesthatareoutofsync).
IftheControllerEQ/Crossover/Levelssettingsdifferfromthosecurrentlyusedbythe
Processor,theaudiosignalmaychangeorbemomentarilymutedwhilesettingsare
configuredifUseDatainComputerisselected.
194
Chapter 16
Keyboard Shortcuts
Reference
16.1
Enabling/Disabling Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboardshortcutsareenabledbydefault.Todisablekeyboardshortcuts,performthe
followingsteps:
1.
FromHome,tapUserPreferences.
2.
TapKeyboardShortcutsorF5.
Allkeyboardshortcutswillbedisabled,andtheFunctionkeylabelswillberemovedfrom
thebuttonsonthebuttonbar.TaptheKeyboardShortcutsbuttonagaintoenablethis
feature.
16.2
General Keyboard Shortcuts

ThekeyboardandmousewheelshortcutsinTable161applythroughoutthesystem.
Table 16-1 Keyboard and Mouse-Wheel Shortcuts
Equivalent Touch-Screen
Operation
Shortcut
System Areas
Esc
Warnings,errormessages,dialog
boxes,andonscreenkeyboard
TappingNoorCancel
Submenus
TappingExit(exitinguponemenu
level)
Enter
Warnings,errormessages,dialog
boxes,andonscreenkeyboard
TappingYesorOK
MouseWheel
Filterpoint(Xover,PEQ,orGEQ
screens)
Draggingthefilterpointupor
down(filtergaincutorboost)
Esc
195
Keyboard Shortcuts Reference
16.3
Button-Bar Shortcuts
16.3.1
Context Switching
Tochangeacontextviewusingthekeyboard,performthefollowingsteps:
1. HolddowntheCkey.
2. Tapthenumberonthekeyboardthatcorrespondstotherequiredcontext.
3. ReleasetheCkey.
16.3.2
Main Navigation/Function Buttons

The<F1>through<F10>keysaremappedsequentiallyfromlefttorighttothemain
navigationandfunctionbuttonsonthebuttonbar.Pressingan<F>keywillhavethesame
effectastappingtheassociatedbuttonwithatouchscreenpenorpointer.Thisappliestoall
buttonbarbuttonsthroughoutthesystem.
16.3.3
Undo/Redo
Toundo/redothelastLevelsorEQchange,performthefollowingsteps:
1. HolddowntheCtrlkey.
2. TaptheZkey.
Thisfunctiontogglesbetweenundoandredo,providingthesameaffectastappingthe
Undo/Redobutton.
16.4
Shortcut Combination Keys

Throughoutthefollowingsections,specificactionsaredescribed.Thesearebasedonthe
genericrulesforcertainkeysasshowninTable162.
Table 16-2 Standard Keyboard Shortcuts
Key
Description
Tab
Movesforward(totheright)throughpages(Mainworkarea),screens,orEQoverlaytabs.
Shift
UsedwithTab,reversestheorderorpage/screennavigation.Usedwiththearrowkeys,
switchesbetweenFineandNormalAdjustmentmodes(Levels/EQ/Xover/Aux)
CapsLock
PermanentlyselectsFineorNormalAdjustmentmode(Levels/EQ/Xover/Aux).Doesnot
workinconjunctionwithTab.
Ctrl
Allowsakeytoperformanotherrelatedfunction.
196
EQ, Levels, Xover, and Aux ScreensGeneral
16.5

Forthepurposesofkeyboardshortcutnavigation,theTabfunctionswillcyclethroughall
Levelsscreens,ifaLevelsscreenisselected,orthroughallXover/Aux/EQscreensifany
Xover/Aux/EQscreenisselected.
Table 16-3 Tab Shortcuts
Keys
Description
Tab+Ctrl
CyclesforwardthroughthevisiblescreensforeitherLevelsorXover/Aux/EQ,depending
onwhatiscurrentlyselected.
Tab
Movesforward(totheright)throughvisiblescreens/overlays.Whenthelast
screen/overlayisreached,itwillcyclebacktothefirstscreen/overlay.
Tab+Shift
Movesbackward(totheleft)throughvisiblescreens/overlays.Onthescreenoverlay,it
willcycletothelastscreen/overlay.
16.5.1
GEQ Overlay Shortcuts

Table 16-4 GEQ Overlay Shortcuts
Keys
Description
LeftArrow
MovestheGEQselectoronefiltertotheleft
RightArrow
MovestheGEQselectoronefiltertotheright
UpArrow
IncreasesthegainoftheselectedGEQfilter(FineAdjustmentmode).
UpArrow+ShiftorCapsLock
IncreasesthegainoftheselectedGEQfilter.
DownArrow
DecreasesthegainoftheselectedGEQfilter(FineAdjustmentmode).
DownArrow+ShiftorCapsLock
DecreasesthegainoftheselectedGEQfilter.
197
16.5.2
PEQ Overlay Shortcuts

Table 16-5 PEQ Overlay Shortcuts
Keys
Description
Addsalowshelffilterat125Hz.
Addsaparametricfilterat500Hz.
AddsaMesafilterwithlowfrequencyat830Hzandhighfrequencyat1.2kHz.
Addsahighshelffilterat8kHz.
Thegainvaluefortheselectedfilterisdisplayedintheonscreenkeyboardforinstant
editing.
Thefrequencyvalueoftheselectedfilterisdisplayedintheonscreenkeyboardforinstant
editing.
F+Ctrl
ThehighfrequencyvalueofaselectedMesafilterisdisplayedintheonscreenkeyboardfor
instantediting.
Thebandwidthvalueoftheselectedfilterisdisplayedintheonscreenkeyboardforinstant
editing.
B+Ctrl
ThehighbandwidthoftheselectedMesafilterisdisplayedintheonscreenkeyboardfor
instantediting.
<
Movesthecenterfrequencyoftheselectedfiltertotheleft.
<+Shiftor
CapsLock
Movesthecenterfrequencyoftheselectedfiltertotheleft(FineAdjustmentmode).
>
Movesthecenterfrequencyoftheselectedfiltertotheright.
>+Shiftor
CapsLock
Movesthecenterfrequencyoftheselectedfiltertotheright(FineAdjustmentmode).
LeftArrow
Selectsthefiltertotheleftofthecurrentlyselectedfilter.
RightArrow
Selectsthefiltertotherightofthecurrentlyselectedfilter.
UpArrow
IncreasesthegainoftheselectedPEQfilter(FineAdjustmentmode).
UpArrow+
ShiftorCaps
Lock
DecreasesthegainoftheselectedPEQfilter
DownArrow
DecreasesthegainoftheselectedPEQfilter(FineAdjustmentmode).
DownArrow+
ShiftorCaps
Lock
DecreasesthegainoftheselectedPEQfilter.
Increasesthebandwidthoftheselectedfilter(lowestfrequencysegmentofaMesafilter).
Decreasesthebandwidthoftheselectedfilter(lowestfrequencysegmentofaMesafilter).
IncreasesthehighbandwidthofaselectedMesafilter.
DecreasesthehighbandwidthofaselectedMesafilter.
MovesthelowfrequencysegmentofaMesafiltertotheleft.
MovesthelowfrequencysegmentofaMesafiltertotheright.
MovesthehighfrequencysegmentofaMesafiltertotheleft.
MovesthehighfrequencysegmentofaMesafiltertotheright.
198
16.5.3
Xover/Aux Screen Shortcuts

Table 16-6 Xover/Aux Shortcuts
Keys
Description
Addsalowshelffiltertotheselectedoutputat125Hz.
Addsaparametricfiltertotheselectedoutputat500Hz.
Addsanallpassfiltertotheselectedoutputat1kHz.(AvailableinDesignerModeonly.)
Addsahighshelffiltertotheselectedoutputat8kHz.
Thegainvaluefortheselectedfilterisdisplayedintheonscreenkeyboardforinstant
editing.(NotapplicabletoHPF/LPFfilters.)
Thefrequencyvalueoftheselectedfilter(EQ,HPF,orLPF)isdisplayedintheonscreen
keyboardforinstantediting.
Thebandwidthvalueoftheselectedfilterisdisplayedintheonscreenkeyboardfor
instantediting.(NotapplicabletoHPF/LPFfilters.)
Theorderofaselectedallpassfilterisdisplayedintheonscreenkeyboardforinstant
editing.(NotapplicabletoanyotherfiltertypeandavailableonlyinDesignerMode.)
<
Movesthecenterfrequencyoftheselectedfiltertotheleft.
<+Shiftor
CapsLock
Movesthecenterfrequencyoftheselectedfiltertotheleft(FineAdjustmentmode).
>
Movesthecenterfrequencyoftheselectedfiltertotheright.
>+Shiftor
CapsLock
Movesthecenterfrequencyoftheselectedfiltertotheright(FineAdjustmentmode).
LeftArrow
Selectsthefiltertotheleftofthecurrentlyselectedfilter.
RightArrow
Selectsthefiltertotherightofthecurrentlyselectedfilter.
UpArrow
IncreasesthegainoftheselectedEQfilter(FineAdjustmentmode).
UpArrow+
ShiftorCaps
Lock
IncreasesthegainoftheselectedEQfilter.
DownArrow
DecreasesthegainoftheselectedEQfilter(FineAdjustmentmode).
DownArrow
+Shiftor
CapsLock
DecreasesthegainoftheselectedEQfilter.
IncreasesthebandwidthoftheselectedEQfilter.
DecreasesthebandwidthoftheselectedEQfilter.
199
16.5.4
Levels Screen Shortcuts

Table 16-7 Levels Shortcuts
Keys
Description
0(zero)+Enter
Displaysonscreenkeyboardforinstantinputleveleditingofthecurrentlyselectedleveltype.
1+Enter
DisplaysonscreenkeyboardforinstantOutput1leveleditingofthecurrentlyselectedlevel
type.
2+Enter
type.
3+Enter
type.
4+Enter
type.
5+Enter
type.
6+Enter
type.
0(zero)+Upor
DownArrow
Increases(up)ordecreases(down)theinputleveloftheselectedleveltype.(FineAdjustment
mode)
1+UporDown
Arrow
Increases(up)ordecreases(down)theOutput1leveloftheselectedleveltype.(Fine
Adjustmentmode)
2+UporDown
Arrow
Adjustmentmode)
3+UporDown
Arrow
Adjustmentmode)
4+UporDown
Arrow
Adjustmentmode)
5+UporDown
Arrow
Adjustmentmode)
6+UporDown
Arrow
Adjustmentmode)
0to6+Upor
DownArrow
withShiftor
CapsLock
Coarseadjustmentmodeforthelevelsofthenumber/arrowcombinationslistedabove.
200
Chapter 17
External Control
Interfaces
17.1
AMX and Crestron Control

FunctionalityiscurrentlyavailableforthefollowingfunctionsviaAMXandCrestron
control:
FramePresetRecall
GainChange
InputMute/Unmute
OutputMute/Unmute
Retrieve/SetFrameName
ThesefunctionsareavailableusingAMXandCrestronEthernetbasedcontrolsystems.These
externalcontrolsystemsmustformvalidEthernetpacketsthatfollowtherequirementsofthe
networkpacketspecification.Pleaseemaillivesoundsupport@dolby.comtoobtainthe
informationrequiredforintegration.
17.2
MIDI Control
17.2.1
Overview
AnexternalhardwaredeviceorsoftwareprogrammaybeconfiguredtotransmitMIDI
SystemExclusivemessages(SysEx)totheDolbyLakeControllersoftware,whichwill
triggertherequestedchangetotheDolbyLakeProcessorsonthenetwork.
Toenablethisfunctionality,thePCrunningtheControllermustprovideaMIDIinputand
associatedMIDIsoftwaredriverscommonlyviathePCsoundcardoradedicatedMIDI
input/outputdevice.
17.2.2
Available Functionality via MIDI

ThefollowingfunctionsareavailableviaMIDISysExmessages:
FramePresetRecall
(00)
GroupOverlayBypass/Insert
(01)
201
External Control Interfaces
ModuleOverlayBypass/Insert (02)
GroupInputMute/Unmute
(03)
ModuleInputMute/Unmute
(04)
GroupInputDelay
(to)
Thesefunctionsareexplainedindetailinthefollowingsections.
17.2.3
Hex Conversion for SysEx Messages

SysExmessagesarestructuredusingastringoftwocharacterhexcodes.Thesetablesshow
thecommonnumbersandalphacharactersthatcanbeusedforthepurposesofDolbyLake
ControllerMIDImessaging.
Numeric Value to Hex Code Conversion

Numericvaluesareusedtoidentifyspecificdatawithinthemessageasdescribedlaterinthis
chapter.ThesenumericvaluesmustbeenteredashexintheSysExmessage.Forexample,the
hexcodeof0C(zero,C)identifiesGroup12forthegroupmutingfunction.
Table 17-1 Decimal and Hexadecimal Equivalents
No.
Hex
No.
Hex
No.
Hex
No.
Hex
No.
Hex
No.
Hex
01
10
0A
19
13
28
1C
37
25
46
2E
02
11
0B
20
14
29
1D
38
26
47
2F
03
12
0C
21
15
30
1E
39
27
48
31
04
13
0D
22
16
31
1F
40
28
49
32
05
14
0E
23
17
32
20
41
29
50
33
06
15
0F
24
18
33
21
42
2A
51
34
07
16
10
25
19
34
22
43
2B
52
35
08
17
11
26
1A
35
23
44
2C
53
36
09
18
12
27
1B
36
24
45
2D
54
37
Alphabet Character to Hex Code Conversion

AlphabetcharactersareusedtoidentifywhichDolbyLakeProcessortoupdateforsome
MIDIcommands.Useuppercaselettersfortheframename,andeachframeonthenetwork
musthaveauniquename.
Table 17-2 Alphabet Letter and Hexadecimal Equivalents
202
Character
Hex
Character
Hex
Character
Hex
(dash)
2D
49
52
41
4A
53
MIDI Control
Character
Hex
Character
Hex
Character
Hex
42
4B
54
43
4C
55
44
4D
56
45
4E
57
46
4F
58
47
50
59
48
51
5A
Forothernumbersandcharacters,pleaserefertostandardASCII/hexmappingtables.
17.2.4
Frame Preset Recall via MIDI (00)

Table173showstheSysExmessagestructureforFramePresetRecall.
Table 17-3 SysEx Message Structure for Frame Preset Recall
Byte
10
11
Example
SysExMessage
F0
00
20
5A
00
2D
2D
2D
2D
01
F7
Table174describesthecontentsofthemessagefields.
Table 17-4 Message Fields for Frame Preset Recall
Byte
Description
Notes
StartSysExMessageIdentifier
AlwaysF0
ManufacturerIDByteOne
00205AforallLakeMIDImessaging
ManufacturerIDByteTwo
ManufacturerIDByteThree
Identifiesthemessagetype
00=FramePresetRecall
FirstcharacterofFrameName
SecondcharacterofFrameName
TheFrameNamemustbeuniqueonthenetwork.
Usecapitalalphanumericvalues.
ThirdcharacterofFrameName
FourthcharacterofFrameName
10
FramePresetnumbertoberecalled
0106respectively
11
FinishSysExMessage
AlwaysF7
Thehexcode2Dintheexampleaboverepresents
thecharacter,whichisthedefaultFrameName.
17.2.5
Insert/Bypass Group EQ Overlay through MIDI (01)

Table175showstheSysExmessagestructureforInsert/BypassGroupEQ
Overlay(MIDI01).
203
Table 17-5 SysEx Message Structure for Insert/Bypass Group EQ Overlay (MIDI 01)
Byte
ExampleSysEx
Message
F0
00
20
5A
01
04
01
01
F7
Table 17-6 Message Fields for Insert/Bypass Group EQ Overlay (MIDI 01)
Byte
Description
Notes
AlwaysF0
01=Insert/BypassGroupEQOverlay
Identifiesthegroupnumber
Group1[01]throughtoGroup28[1C]
Numberoftheoverlaytoinsert/bypass
PEQ1=01,PEQ2=02,andsoon(0104)
Signifieswhethertoinsertorbypass
Bypass=00;Insert=01
FinishSysExMessage
AlwaysF7
17.2.6
Insert/Bypass Module EQ Overlay through MIDI (02)

Table177showstheSysExmessagestructureforInsert/BypassGroupEQOverlay
(MIDI02).
Table 17-7 SysEx Message Structure for Insert/Bypass Group EQ Overlay (MIDI 02)
Byte
10
11
12
13
Example
SysEx
Message
F0
00
20
5A
02
2D
2D
2D
2D
01
01
00
F7
Table 17-8 Message Fields for Insert/Bypass Group EQ Overlay (MIDI 02)
Byte
Description
AlwaysF0
02=Insert/BypassModuleEQOverlay
204
Notes
MIDI Control
Byte
Description
Notes
ModuleReference
ModuleA=01
ModuleB=02
ModuleC=03(Mesaonly)
ModuleD=04(Mesaonly)
11
Numberoftheoverlaytoinsert/bypass
PEQ1=01,GEQ2=02,andsoon(0108)
12
Signifieswhethertoinsertorbypass
Bypass=00;Insert=01
13
FinishSysExMessage
AlwaysF7
10
17.2.7
Mute/Unmute Group Input through MIDI (03)

Table179showstheSysExthemessagestructureforMute/UnmuteGroupInput(MIDI03).
Table 17-9 SysEx Message Structure for Mute/Unmute Group Input (MIDI 03)
Byte
ExampleSysEx
Message
F0
00
20
5A
03
01
01
F7
Table 17-10 Message Fields for Mute/Unmute Group Input (MIDI 03)
Byte
Description
Notes
AlwaysF0
03=Mute/UnmuteGroupInput
Identifiesthegroupnumber
Signifieswhethertomuteorunmute
Unmute=00;Mute=01
FinishSysExMessage
AlwaysF7
17.2.8
Mute/Unmute Module Input through MIDI (04)

Table1711showstheSysExmessagestructureforthemessagestructureforMute/Unmute
GroupInput(MIDI04).
205
Table 17-11 SysEx Message Structure for Mute/Unmute Group Input (MIDI 04)
Byte
10
11
12
Example
SysEx
Message
F0
00
20
5A
04
2D
2D
2D
2D
01
01
F7
Table 17-12 Message Fields for Mute/Unmute Group Input (MIDI 04)
Byte
Description
Notes
AlwaysF0.
00205AforallLakeMIDImessaging.
04=Mute/UnmuteModuleInput.
ModuleReference
ModuleA=01
ModuleB=02
ModuleC=03(Mesaonly)
ModuleD=04(Mesaonly).
11
Signifieswhethertomuteorunmute
Unmute=00;Mute=01.
12
FinishSysExMessage
AlwaysF7.
10
206
MIDI Control
17.2.9
Change Group Input Delay Through MIDI (05)

Table1713showstheSysExmessagestructureforchangingGroupInputDelay(MIDI05).
Table 17-13 SysEx Message Structure for Group Input Delay (MIDI 05)
Byte
10
ExampleSysEx
Message
F0
00
20
5A
05
01
11
2B
4B
F7
Table 17-14 Message Fields for Group Input Delay (MIDI 05)
Byte
Description
Notes
AlwaysF0
05=ChangeGroupInputDelay
IdentifiestheGroupnumber
(1)00(20)00millisecondsofdelay
Firstpairofdigitsrepresentinghundredsand
thousands(forexample,11=1,700ms)
(1)>(99)millisecondsofdelay
Secondpairofdigitsrepresentingsingleunitsand
tens(forexample,2B=43ms)
0.(01)0.(99)millisecondsofdelay
Thirdpairofdigitsrepresentingnumbersafter
decimalplace(forexample,4B=0.75ms)
FinishSysExMessage
AlwaysF7
7
8
9
10
Forexample,bytes7,8,and9formthedelaytimeinmilliseconds:xxyy.zz,wherexxisbyte7,
yyisbyte8,andzzisbyte9.Intheexampleabove(11:2B:4B),theresultingtimein
millisecondsis1,743.75.
207
Chapter 18
Designer Mode
Reference
18.1
Designer Mode Basics

TheDolbyLakeControllersoftwareprovidestwomodesofoperation:UserModeand
DesignerMode.ThischapterdescribestheDesignerMode.
SomeimportantfunctionsthatDesignerModeactivatesincludethefollowing:
GlobalAccesssecurity
Individualoverlay/screenaccesssecurity
LevelLimits
Factorylevels(AdjustFactorymode)
Passwordprotectionofmodulesandbaseconfigurations
Allpassfilters
DesignerWorksheets
Polaritylocking
Thisdocumentprovidesdetaileddescriptionsofthesefunctions.Anexamplesystemdesign
illustratestheutilityofDesignerModefunctions.Aquickreferenceguideprovidesahigh
leveloverviewofDesignerModefunctions.
Thisdocumentreferstoloudspeakermodulesintheexamples,althoughallfeatures(withthe
exceptionofcrossovers)alsoapplytoMesaEQTMmodules.
18.1.1
Security Levels
DesignerModeprovidesthreelevelsofpasswordprotectedsecuritythatcanbeappliedtoa
systemconfiguration.
Global
Atthegloballevel,asimpleselectionmakessystemwidechangesthataffectwhatcanbe
seenoradjustedinUserMode.AsystemdesignercanchoosetohideanycombinationofEQ
overlays,Xover/HPF/LPFtabs,levels,andmeters.TheseitemscanalsobesettoViewOnly,
allowingaUserModeoperatortoviewbutnotchangecertaininformation.
209
Designer Mode Reference
Note: Globalsettingsaresavedinthesystemconfigurationfile.
Module
IndividualEQoverlaysandcrossovertabscanbehiddenorsettoViewOnly.Additional
settingsnormallyinvisibleinUserModecanalsobeadjustedandhiddenatthemodule
level.
Atthemodulelevel,changesarespecifictoindividualmodulesandgroups.Discrete
passwordprotectioncanbeappliedtomodules,providinganadditionallevelofsecurity.
Base Configuration
Baseconfigurationisthelowestlevelofmodulesecurity,enablingthesystemdesignerto
defineanunderlyingbaseEQcurveandcrossoversettingsalongwithfactorylevelsandlevel
limits.Asystemdesignercanrestrictwhatcanbeseenoradjustedandprovideoptional
passwordprotectiontotheunderlyingsettings.
Note: TheDolbyLakeControllerisnotshippedwithbaseconfigurationfiles.Thesecanbe
createdifrequiredusingdefaultmodulefiles.
18.1.2
Designer Mode
ThefunctionsavailableinDesignerModecanbeusedwithorwithoutpasswordprotection.
Bydefault,theDesignerModepasswordisempty,allowingunprotectedaccesstoDesigner
ModeinanewinstallationoftheDolbyLakeControllersoftware.
ToaccessDesignerMode:
1.
2.
TapDesignerFunctions.
3.
TapDesignerMode.
Additionalbuttonsonthebuttonbarbecomeactive,providingfunctionsspecifictoDesigner
Mode.
210
Designer Mode Basics
WhenDesignerModeisactive,thetextDesignerModeappearsabovethetoolbar.
Password Protection of Designer Mode

EachsoftwareinstallationhasoneDesignerModepassword.Thispasswordisstoredonthe
hostcomputerandisrelevantforanysystemconfiguration.
TopasswordprotectDesignerMode,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TaptheChangePasswordbutton.
2.
Enterapassword,andtapOK.
3.
Confirmthepassword,andtapOK.
ItisimportantthatyourecordtheDesignerModepasswordinasafeplace.Oncethe
passwordisset,itwillalwaysberequiredtoenterDesignerMode.
Note: IftheDesignerModepasswordisforgotten,pleasecontact
livesoundsupport@dolby.comfordetailsonpasswordretrieval.
Simple Designer Mode System Security

IfmultiplelevelsofsecurityarenotrequiredforyourDolbyLakeControllerinstallation,
exitingDesignerModeactivatesallsecurityfeaturesdescribedinthisdocumentwithout
needingtolockorpasswordprotectindividualmodulesorbaseconfigurationfiles.
18.1.3
Designing and Protecting a Dolby Lake Controller System

ThissectiondiscusseshowtouseDesignerModetoprotectyoursystembydevelopingan
examplesystemwithoneDolbyLakeProcessor.Theexampleincludesdetailedinstructions
todefineabaseconfiguration,lockindividualmodulelevelsettings,andenforceglobal
security.
Note: YoumusthaveproperlynetworkedaProcessorandtheDolbyLakeControllerhost
computer.
211
System Setup for Designer Mode Tutorial

Followthestepsbelowtoprepareforthetutorial.
ToaccessDesignerMode,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
2.
TapDesignerFunctions.
3.
TaptheDesignerModebuttonandenteryourDesignerModepasswordifprompted.(If
theDesignerModebuttonisorange,youarealreadyloggedintoDesignerMode.)
4.
TapHometoreturntotheMainmenu.
5.
PlacethemodulesofafactoryresetProcessorintheworkarea.
Tolabeltheframeandsavethesystem:
1.
TapStore/RecallExit,thentapLabel&Lock.
2.
TapLabelFrame,enterLakeastheframename,andtapOK.
3.
TapHome,thenSystemStore/Recall.
4.
Navigatetoorcreateafolderinwhichtostorethefile.
5.
TapNewStore,enterthefilenameasDesignerModeTutorial,andtapOK.
Yoursystemconfigurationisnowreadyforthefollowingtutorials.
18.2
Designer Mode Security
18.2.1
Security for the Base Configuration

AbaseconfigurationfilecontainsEQ,levels,crossover,andHPF/LPFinformationfora
particularspeakertype.Abaseconfigurationfilecanbeusedtocreateastandardstarting
pointforaparticularmakeandmodelofspeaker;thiscanthenbeusedinavarietyofsystem
configurationsandfinetunedusingmoduleandgroupsettings.
Thebasepasswordissavedwiththebaseconfigurationfileandisstoredatthehardware
levelwhenloadedintoaDolbyLakeProcessor.Thispreventsaccesstocertaindatastoredin
thebaseconfigurationfile,evenifyouareinDesignerModeintheDolbyLakeController
software.Usingabasepasswordallowshidingofyourcustomsettingsfromanyuserofthe
Controllersystem.
Note: ThebaseconfigurationfilehidesEQcurves,crossovers,orhighpassandlowpass
filters,andconvertsgroupandmodulelevelstohiddenFactoryvalues.Theuseof
baseconfigurationfilesisrecommendedonlyforexperiencedControlleruserswho
requirethisadditionallevelofsecurityandfunctionality.Modulefilesprovide
additionalfunctionalitytobaseconfigurationfilesandcanbeusedinsteadofbase
configurationfilesinmostcircumstances.
212
Crossover and Output EQ

AllinformationintheXoverscreen(LakeContourTM)orHPF/LPFscreen(MesaEQ)isstored
inthebaseconfigurationfile,includingcrossoverfrequencies,crossovertype(forexample,
Bessel,Butterworth,orLinkwitzRiley),alongwithanyoutputspecificEQ,HPF/LPF
settings,andcrossoveraccessstatus.AlldataintheXoverscreencanbeadjustedforeach
module,unlessthedesignerhasappliedsecuritytothebaseconfigurationfile.
AbaseconfigurationfilecannotbeloadedintoamodulerunningadifferentDSPprogram.
Forexample,atwowaybaseconfigurationfilecannotbeloadedintoamodulethatis
currentlyrunningathreewaymoduleprogram;atwowaymoduleprogrammustbeloaded
first.
PEQ and GEQ

AllmoduleandgroupEQoverlaysarecombinedandstoredasaninvisibledefaultEQcurve
forthenewbaseconfiguration.Oncestoredinthebaseconfigurationfiles,thisdefaultEQ
curvecannotbeviewedoradjusted,althoughfurtherEQoverlayscanbecreatedatthe
moduleorgrouplevel.Whenthenewbaseconfigurationfileisloadedintoadifferent
module,themainEQappearsflat.OutputspecificEQfromtheXoveroroutputEQscreens
canstillbeviewedoradjusted,unlessthesystemdesignerhasprotectedit.
Note: TheEQcurvecreatedinthePEQandGEQoverlaysisseparatefromanyoutput
specificEQcreatedontheXoverpage(applicabletoloudspeakermodulesonly).
Levels
WiththeexceptionoftheMaxRMSLimiterCorner,AttackandRelease,thecurrentmodule
andgrouplevelsarecombinedandstoredasfactorylevelswhenabaseconfigurationfileis
saved.ThefactorylevelscanbeviewedandadjustedinDesignerModeafteractivatingthe
AdjustFactoryoptionintheLevels/MeterOptionsmenu.
LevelLimits,alsostoredwithabaseconfigurationfile,canbeviewedandadjustedfrom
Levels/MeterOptionsLevelsLimits.
Base Configuration Tutorial

Thistutorialillustratesimportantfeaturesofbaseconfigurationfiles,usingloudspeaker
modulesastheexample.ForMesaEQprocessors,usetheonlyoutputavailableoneach
moduleandignorethestepsregardingcrossovers.
ToadjustlevelsandLevelLimits,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
NavigatetotheGainlevelspageofmoduleA.
2.
AdjusttheOutput2gainto9dB.
213
3.
TaptheDelaybuttonandincreaseOutput3delayto6ms.
4.
TapMeterOptions,thentapLevelLimits.
5.
SelectGain/DelayLimits.
6.
TaptheMaxDelayvaluehighlightedinbluefortheinputchannel.Thisislocatedonthe
leftofthescreen,secondfrombottom,andshouldinitiallyread1800.00.
7.
Enter0(zero),andtapOK.
SettingamaximumvalueidenticaltotheminimumvalueremovesthefaderwheninUser
Mode,orwhenthebaseconfigurationfileormoduleislocked.
Toadjustcrossoversettings,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TaptheEQtab(topleft)andselectXover(LakeContour)orHPF/LPF(MesaEQ).
2.
Withthefirstoutput(lowfrequency)selected,tapCrossoverSelect.
3.
Select36dBButterworthfromthescrollbar.
4.
TapCrossoverSet,thentapYestothewarningmessage.
5.
TapHPFEnablelocatedatthetopleftofthescreen.
6.
TapXoverFunctionsfromthebuttonbar,thentapCrossoverViewOnly.Thishidesthe
crossoverscreenorHPF/LPFscreenwheninUserMode,orwhenthebase
configuration/moduleislocked.
ToaddEQ,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TapPEQ1andaddalowshelffilteraround80Hz,with3dBofgain.
2.
TapHome.
Tolockthebaseconfiguration,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TapModules,thentapmoduleAtoselectit.
2.
TapLabel&Lock.Thefollowingoptionsaredisplayed:
3.
TapSetBasePassword,typeDemo,andtapOK.
4.
TypeDemoagaintoconfirm,andtapOKtothemessage.
5.
TapBaseUnlocked.ThischangestoreadUnlockBaseandthepasswordisnow
requiredtounlockthisbaseconfigurationfile.
TheXoverpagewillbedisplayedasViewOnlyuntilitisunlocked.Anyuser,evenasystem
designer,cannotadjustthesettingsunlesstheyfirstunlockthebaseconfigurationfile.
LevelLimitsandAdjustFactoryoptionsarelockedoutinbothUserModeandDesigner
Mode,andtheinputdelayfaderisremovedwheninUserMode.
214
Tosavethenewbaseconfigurationfile,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TapLabelExit,thenModuleStore/Recall.
2.
TapBaseConfiguration.
3.
Navigatetothedesiredfolderlocationorcreateanewfolder.
4.
TapNewStore,enterBaseConfigTest,andtapOK.
Thefileisstoredinthefolderyounavigatedtopriortostoring,andthescreenappears
similartothefollowingfigure.
Inadditiontolockingthecrossover,HPF/LPF,andEQofabaseconfigurationfile,theentire
filecanbeprotectedfromaccidentaldeletion.
Tosecurethebaseconfigurationfile,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TapFileUtilities.
2.
SelecttheBaseConfigTestbaseconfigurationfilefromthescrollbar.
3.
TapReadOnly.NoticethattheDeletebuttonisnowdisabledforthisfile.
Note: Forfurtherprotection,baseconfigurationfileutilitiesaredisabledwheninUser
Mode.
ToloadthenewbaseconfigurationfileintomoduleBoftheProcessor:
1.
TapFileUtilExit,thentapthemoduleBicontoselectit.
2.
SelecttheBaseConfigTestfileonthescrollbar,andtapRecall.
3.
TapYestothewarningmessage.
AlldatachangedduringthistutorialisloadedintomoduleB,andbecausethebase
configurationwaslocked,somedataisnowinvisibleorprotected.Navigatetothevarious
sectionsofmoduleBtoverifythechangesmadetothebaseconfigurationfile.
215
Issue
Navigate to...
LevelsMeterOptions
FactoryLevelsarelocked.
TheAdjustFactorybuttonnormallypresentisnot
availableuntilthebaseconfigurationfileisunlocked.
LevelsMeterOptions
LevelLimitsarelocked.
TheInputDelayMaxLevelLimitissetto
zero.
TheLevelLimitsbuttonnormallypresentisnot
availableuntilthebaseconfigurationfileisunlocked.
LevelsDelay
Attempttomovetheinputdelayfader.DesignerMode
only.(InUserMode,thisdelayfaderisremoved.)
CrossoverandHPF/LPFsettingshave
beentransferredandaresetto
ViewOnly,
EQXovertab
or
HPF/LPFsettingshavebeenhavebeen
transferredandaresettoViewOnly.
EQHPF/LPFtab.
Notapplicable.
TheEQsettinghasbeentransferred.
PEQandGEQsettingssavedinbaseconfigurationfiles
cannotbeviewed,althoughanaudiocomparisoncan
bemadebetweenmoduleAandBtoverifytheyare
identical.
Summary
Baseconfigurationfilesenablelowlevelsecurityallowingcontroloverindividualaspectsof
thesystem.ThesystemdesignercanfinetuneaspeakerconfigurationorsystemEQand
protectthesettingsbyhidingorsettingthemasViewOnly.
Thebaseconfigurationfilescanbesavedandloadedintoothermodulesinthesamesystem
orindifferentsystems.Thisprovidesastartingpointfromwhichthemodulecanbefine
tunedbyanotherdesigneroruser.
Note: ThemoduleI/OConfigscreendisplaysthenameofthebaseconfigurationfilethat
wasoriginallyloadedormostrecentlysaved.ModuleI/OConfigislocatedunder
theModulesmenu.
18.2.2
Security for Module Functions

Allsettingsthatcanbeprotectedforabaseconfigurationcanalsobeprotectedforamodule.
Baseconfigurationsettingsareoverwrittenbymodulesettings,unlessaccesshasbeen
restrictedinthebaseconfigurationfile,inwhichcasecertainparameterswillnotbe
accessible.Thebaseconfigurationfileitselfwillnotbeaffectedbyanychangesmadetoa
moduleafterthefileisloaded.
216
Themodulepasswordissavedwiththesinglemodulefile,andisstoredatthehardware
levelwhenloadedintoaDolbyLakeProcessor.Thispreventsaccesstocertaindatastoredin
themodulefile,evenifyouareinDesignerModeintheDolbyLakeController.Usinga
ModulepasswordallowshidingofyourcustomsettingsfromanyuseroftheController.
Thefollowingfeaturesareavailableforbothbaseconfigurationandmodulefiles:
Adjustandlockfactorylevels
Adjustandlockaccesstocrossoversettings
Hideunusedchannels
AdjustLevelLimits
Disableindividuallevelfadersorentirelevelssectionsfromotherusers(usingLevel
LimitsandModuleLock)
Inadditiontothesefeatures,asystemdesignercanalsoadjustandlockaccesstoindividual
PEQandGEQoverlays.
Module Tutorial
ThefollowingtutorialillustratesDesignerModesmostimportantmodulefeatures.Italso
includessomefunctionsthatrelatetobothbaseconfigurationandmodulefiles,suchasLevel
Limits.UsethesameDesignerModetutorialsystemconfigurationfromearlierinthis
chapter.EnsureyouareinDesignerModeandthatthebaseconfigurationisunlockedbefore
proceeding.
ForMesaEQmodules,usetheonlyoutputavailableoneachmoduleandignorethesteps
regardingcrossovers.
ToaddPEQandsettheoverlaytoViewOnly,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
NavigatetothePEQ1pageofmoduleA.
2.
Addahighshelffilter(gain:10dB;frequency:10kHz;bandwidth:3).
3.
TapOverlayFunctions,thenOverlayProperties.
4.
TapOverlayViewOnly(illuminatesorange).
ToaddGEQandhidetheoverlay,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TapGEQ2.
2.
Reducethe125Hzfilterby6dB.
3.
TapOverlayHide(illuminatesorange).
Note: WhenanEQoverlayishidden,theeffectitsfiltershaveontheoverallEQcurveis
notvisibleinUserModeorwhenthemoduleislocked.
Toremoveanunusedchannelmeterandfader,performthefollowingsteps(notapplicable
forMesaEQ):
217
1.
TaptheLevelstab.
2.
TapLabelChannel.
3.
TaptheMute/Labelbuttonofoutput3.
4.
Typeunused,andtapOK.
Tolockthemodule,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TapHome,thenModules.
2.
TaptheiconformoduleAtoselectit.
3.
TapLabel&Lock,thenSetModPassword.
4.
Typedemo,thentapOK.
5.
Typedemoagaintoconfirm,tapOK,thentapOKtothemessage.
6.
TapModuleUnlocked.
Tosavethenewmodulefile,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TapLabelExit,thenModuleStore/Recall.
2.
Navigatetotherequiredfolder.
3.
TapNewStore,typedemomodule,andtapOK.
ToloadthesavedfileintomoduleB,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TaptheiconformoduleB.
2.
TaptheDemomodulefileonthescrollbar.
3.
TapRecall,thenYestothewarningmessage.
4.
ExitDesignerModetoseetheeffectofthechangesonmoduleA.(ModuleBisalready
lockedfollowingloadingthemodulefile.)Allupdatesmadepreviouslyalsoremain.
Summary
Modulescanstoreandsecurealldatathatabaseconfigurationcan.Inaddition,themodule
canrestrictaccesstoinputEQoverlays.
18.2.3
Security for Group Functions

Groupsareusedtoconnectandadjustmultiplemodules.Groupscannotbelockedor
passwordprotected,butindividualEQoverlayscanbehidden.GlobalAccesssettingsalso
applytogroups.Securityforlevelsandcrossoversisnotrelevantforgroups.
Agroupmaycontainvarioustypesofmodules,eachwithdifferentsecuritysettings.Group
levels,however,arerestrictedbythelevellimitssetforthemoduleswithinthegroup.For
example,ifchangingagrouplevelcausesoneormoremodulestoexceedtheir
minimum/maximumlevellimits,theactionisnotpermitted.
218
Group Tutorial
Toaddagrouptotheconfiguration,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
FromHome,tapGroups.
2.
TapGroup1fromtheGroupsscrollbar,andtapagainintheworkarea.
3.
TapAssign,thentapthemoduleAandmoduleBicons.
4.
TapAssignagaintoexittheGroupAssignmentmode.
5.
TapEQ/LevelsandnavigatetothePEQ1pageofGroup1.
ToaddPEQandhidetheoverlay,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
Addaparametricfilter(gain:6dB;frequency:125Hz;bandwidth:1).
2.
3.
TapOverlayHide(illuminatesorange),thentapOvlayPropExit.
Note: WhenanEQoverlayishidden,theeffectitsfiltershaveontheoverallEQcurveare
ToaddGEQandsettheoverlaytoViewOnly,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TapOverlayNew.TheoverlayGroup1/PEQ2iscreated.
2.
TapOverlayGEQ,thenYestothewarningmessage.
3.
Reducethe4kHzfilterby4dB.
4.
TapOverlayProperties,thenOverlayViewOnly(illuminatesorange).
Toverifytheeffectofthechanges,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
TapHome,thenUserPreferences.
2.
TapDesignerModetoreturntoUserMode(buttonbecomesblue).
3.
TapHome,thentaptheGroup1iconandnavigatetoEQ.
PEQ1ishidden,anditsfilterisnotdisplayedintheEQcurve,althoughitseffectisstill
audible.GEQ2isdisplayedasViewOnly,andmostfunctionsaredisabled.
Summary
Becauseagroupmaycontainvarioustypesofmoduleswithdifferentsecuritysettings,group
securityislimitedtoEQoverlaysonly.Crossoversarenotrelevanttogroups,andallsecurity
forlevelsiscontrolledviaindividualmodules.
219
18.2.4
Security for Global Access Functions

GlobalAccesssettingsaffectallmodulesandgroupswithinasystemconfiguration.To
enableGlobalAccessmode,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
2.
TapDesignerFunctions.(EnsureDesignerModeisactiveorange.)
3.
TapGlobalAccess.
Thefollowingoptionsareavailable:
Table 18-1 Global Access Security Functions
Function
Result in Normal User Mode
EQHide
HidesallEQoverlaysforallmodulesandgroups
EQViewOnly
ProtectsallEQoverlaysfromadjustmentforallmodulesandgroups
XoverHide
HidesallXoverscreensorHPF/LPFscreensforallmodulesandgroups
XoverViewOnly
ProtectsallXoverscreensorHPF/LPFscreensfromadjustmentforall
modulesandgroups
LevelsHide
HidesallLevelsscreensforallmodulesandgroups
LevelsViewOnly
ProtectsallLevelsscreensfromadjustmentforallmodulesandgroups
Global Access Tutorial

Tohideallcrossover,HPF/LPFandEQoverlaysinasystem,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
2.
TapGlobalAccess,thentapEQHide.
3.
TapXoverHide.Activebuttonsilluminateorange.
4.
Toactivatetheseglobalsettings:
TapGlblAccessExit.
TapDesignerMode.Thebuttonbecomesblue(inactive/available)inUserMode.
Summary
TheGlobalAccessfunctionsapplyanoverallsecuritytoaparticularControllersystemand
canbeusedinadditiontothesystemsecuritysettings.
220
Functional Reference Guide
18.3

ThissectionprovidesanoverviewofthestepsrequiredforeachDesignerModeprocess.This
canbeusedasaquickreferenceforthefeaturesdescribedthroughoutthetutorialbasedon
theprocedureorfunction.ThissectiondescribesthestandardfunctionsusingtheLevels,
Xover,andEQscreens.
Note: DesignerModemustbeactivetoaccessthefunctionsdescribedinthissection.
18.3.1
Xover/Aux/HPF/LPF Functions
Thesefunctionsapplytobaseconfigurationsandmodulesonly.TheXoverbuttonslisted
belowcouldreadAuxOutputorHPF/LPFdependingonthemoduletype.
Set Individual Xover/Aux or HPF/LPF Screens to Hide/View Only

1.
NavigatetotheXoverorAuxOutputscreenortotheHPF/LPFscreen.
2.
TapCrossoverFunctions.
3.
TapCrossoverViewOnlyorCrossoverHide.Theselectedstatusisilluminatedorange.
Set All Xover/Aux or HPF/LPF Screens to Hide/View Only

Thisaffectsallcrossoverscreensinthecurrentsystemconfiguration.
1.
2.
TapGlobalAccess.
3.
TapCrossoverHideorCrossoverViewOnly.Theselectedstatusisilluminatedorange.
All Pass Filters

InDesignerMode,theAllPassfilterisavailableontheXover/AuxOutputscreens.TheAll
Passfiltericonisidentifiedinthefollowingfigure:
TheAllPassfilterallowsfirstandsecondorder(default)phaseadjustmentwithvariable
bandwidthandfrequency.
221
ToaddanAllPassfiltertoanoutput,performthefollowingsteps:
18.3.2
1.
SelectanoutputontheXoverpage,orselecttherequiredAuxOutputscreen.
2.
TaptheAllPassfiltericon.
3.
Taponthemainpartofthescreentoaddthefilter.
4.
Adjusttheorder,frequency,andbandwidthasrequired.
EQ Functions
Note: Thesefunctionsapplyonlytomodulesandgroups.
Set Hide/View Only Status for an Individual EQ Overlay

1.
NavigatetothemoduleorgroupoverlayinEQ/Levels.
2.
3.
TapOverlayViewOnlyorOverlayHide.Theselectedstatusisilluminatedorange.
Set Hide/View Only Status for All EQ Overlays

ThisaffectsallEQoverlaysinthecurrentsystemconfiguration.
18.3.3
1.
2.
TapGlobalAccess.
3.
TapEQHide/EQViewOnly.
Levels Functions
Adjust Factory
AbuttonlabeledAdjustFactoryisavailableontheMeterOptionsmenufromtheLevels
pageofamodule.Whenthisbuttonisactive(orange),alabelreadingAdjustFactoryappears
atthetopofeachLevelspagetoconfirmthisspecialmodeofoperation.Factorylevelsarenot
applicableforgroups.
Inthismode,adifferentsetoffactorylevelsaredisplayedforeachleveltype.Theseare
displayedusingthesamefadersandmetersusedfortheadjustmentofuserlevels;thefader
positionsandgainvalueschangetoindicatethefactorylevelinsteadoftheuserlevel.
Note: Thesumoffactory,user,andgrouplevelsarecombinedtoprovidetheactualtotal.
Factorylevelsarenotincludedinthetotallevelvaluethatisshowninbracketsin
UserMode.
222
Table181showswhichleveltypesareavailableinAdjustFactorymode.
Table 18-1 Available Level Types in Adjust Factory Mode
Level Type
Available
Gain
Yes
Delay
Yes
MaxRMSLevel
Yes
MaxRMSCorner
No
MaxRMSAttack
No
MaxRMSRelease
No
MaxPeakLevel
Yes
Tosetfactorylevels,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
FromtheLevelspage,tapMeterOptions,thenAdjustFactory.
2.
TapMeterOptsExit,andnavigatetotherelevantLevelspage.
3.
Enterthevaluesrequiredusingthefaderorkeyboardentry.
4.
TapMeterOptions,thenAdjustFactorytoexitthismode.
Note: Factorylevelscanbehiddenfromtheenduserbylockingthemoduleorexiting
DesignerMode.
Restrict Level Adjustments

LevelLimitsareusedtorestrictminimumandmaximumlevelsforamodule.Althougha
groupsLevelLimitscannotbeset,theyadheretothelimitsofallmodulesthatareassigned
toit.Forexample,ifchangingagrouplevelcausesanyofitsmodulestoexceedtheir
allowablerange,theactionisnotpermitted.
1.
NavigatetomoduleLevels,tapMeterOptions,thentapLevelLimits.
2.
TapGain/DelayLimitsorLimiterMaxTMLimits.
3.
Taptherelevantminimum/maximumlevel.Eachchannelisdisplayedinthesameorder
asthechannelfaders(fromlefttoright:Input,Output1,Output2,andsoon).
4.
Enterthelimit,andtapOK.
223
Disable Level Adjustments

Iftheminimumandmaximumlevellimitsareidenticalforaparticularchannelandlevel
type,thatcontroliseffectivelydisabled.Thefaderfortheassociatedchannelandleveltypeis
Setboththeminimumandmaximumvaluesofaparticularleveloutputandleveltypetothe
samevalue.Toverifythatthefaderhasbeenremovedandthelevelfixed,eitherlockthe
moduleorbaseconfigurationorswitchtoUserMode.
Disable Access to a Levels Function

Todisableaccesstoanentirelevelfunction(delay,forexample),setidenticalminimumand
maximumdelaylevellimitsforeverychannelforthemodule.Settheminimumand
maximumvaluesofallinputs/outputsforaparticularleveltypetothesamevalue.
Theprecedingfigureshowsanexampleofidenticalminimum/maximumsettingsfordelay.
ThesesettingsdisabletheLevelsfunctionontheEQ/LevelsmenuinUserModeorwhenthe
moduleorbaseconfigurationislocked.
224
Disable/Enable Unused Output Channels

Tocompletelyhidealevelsmeter/fader,setthenameoffadertoUnused,performthe
followingsteps:
1.
NavigatetotherelevantmoduleLevelspage.
2.
TapLabelChannel,thentapthemute/labelbuttonoftherelevantchannel.
3.
TypeUnused,andtapOK.
ThemeterandfaderwillbeinvisibleonthesoftwareController,andthemeterisalso
disabledonthefrontpaneloftheDolbyLakeProcessor.Toenablethechannelagain,change
thechannellabeltosomethingotherthanUnused.
Set Hide/View Only Status for All Levels Screens

ThisfunctionaffectsallLevelsscreensinthecurrentsystemconfiguration.
18.3.4
1.
2.
TapGlobalAccess,thentapLevelsHideorLevelsViewOnly.Theselectedbuttonis
illuminatedorange.
Additional Designer Mode Functions
Switch between Designer Mode and User Mode

ToaccessDesignerMode,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
FromHome,tapUserPreferences,thentapDesignerMode.
2.
Enterthepassword(ifset),andtapOK.
ToswitchtoUserMode,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
FromHome,tapUserPreferences.TheDesignerModebuttonisorangewhenDesigner
Modeisactive.
2.
TapDesignerMode.TheDesignerModebuttonisnowblue;DesignerModeisinactive.
Lock and Password-Protect a Module or Base Configuration

Lockingamoduleorbaseconfigurationenablesaccesssecurity(suchashidingEQoverlays,
settingXoverscreenstoViewOnly,anddisablinglevelfunctions).TheLabel&Lockfunction
activatessecurityinbothUserModeandDesignerMode,allowingcertainsettingstobe
protectedfromothersystemdesigners.
FromtheModulesmenu,tapamoduleicontoselectit.
225
1.
TapLabel&Lock.
2.
TapSetModPassword(formodule)orSetBasePassword(forbasemodule).
3.
Enterapassword,andtapOK.
4.
Confirmpassword,tapOK,thentapOKtothewarningmessage.
5.
TapModuleUnlockedorBaseUnlockedtolocktherelevantsettings.
Unlock a Locked Module or Base Configuration

FromtheModulesmenu,tapamoduleicontoselectit.
1.
TapLabel&Lock.
2.
TapUnlockModuleorUnlockBase.
3.
Entertheassociatedpassword,andtapOK.
Creating Descriptions/Assigning Graphics for Module Files

Textfiles(.txt)andbitmapfiles(.bmp)withthesamefilenameasamodulefilecanbeplaced
inthedata/user/modulesdirectoryofyourControllerinstallation.
Whenatextfileispresentwiththesamefilename,theControllerdisplaysthetextwhenthe
modulefileisselectedontheModuleStore/Recallscrollbar.Whenabitmapfileispresent,
thegraphicisdisplayedinplaceofthedefaultmoduleicon.
Note: Ifbitmapfilesareusedtoreplacethestandardmodulegraphics,thesemustbe24bit
MicrosoftWindowsformatbitmapsof8080pixelsmaximumdimension.
Modulenametextwilloverwritethebottomportionofthis8080bitmap.
Followthesestepstocreateandviewmodulefiledescriptions:
1. Storeamodulewiththefilenameexampleatthemodulerootdirectory.
2. MinimizetheControllerand,usingatexteditor(suchasMicrosoftNotepad),createatext
filecontainingthetext:ExampledescriptionforExampleModule.
226
Designer Worksheets
3. Storethistextfileinthedirectory:
Program Files/Dolby/Dolby Lake Controller/data/user/modules as example.txt.
4. MaximizetheDolbyLakeControllerandnavigatetoModuleStore/Recall.
5. Selectthemodulefileexamplefromthescrollbar.Thetextyouenteredappearsabovethe
moduleasshownhere:
Moduledescriptionscanbemodifiedbyeditingthetextfile,orremovedbydeletingthetext
file.Ashortcuttothedata/userfolderisavailablefrom:
StartProgramsDolbyLakeControllerDolbyLakeControllerUserDataFiles
Note: Folderdescriptionscanalsobecreatedbyplacingatextfilewiththesamenameas
thefolderinthesamedirectoryasthefolder.
18.4
Designer Worksheets
18.4.1
Overview
TheDesignerWorksheetprovidesfastviewandupdateaccesstothemajorityofdatafora
DolbyLakeProcessorviaaspreadsheetstyleinterface.
TheseworksheetsareavailableonlyinDesignerMode,viathemoduleI/OConfig&
Worksheetsbutton.
227
ToaccesstheDesignerWorksheets,performthefollowingsteps:
1. FromHome,tapModules.
2. TapI/OConfig&Worksheets.
ThefollowingscreentabsareavailableforloudspeakermodulesinDesignerMode:
ThefollowingscreentabsareavailableforMesaprocessorsinDesignerMode:
3. TaptheLevelsDesigntab.
Dependingontheworksheet/moduletype,ascreensimilartothefollowingwillbe
displayed.
228
Designer Worksheets
18.4.2
Worksheet Navigation and Data Entry

Tonavigatetotheworksheets,selectoneoftheDesigntabsatthetopofthescreen.
External Keyboard Entry

ForfastdataentryviatheDesignerWorksheet,anexternalkeyboardshouldbeattached.Use
thearrowkeystonavigatearoundthecellsoftheworksheet,andentervaluesanddatausing
thekeyboard.Thedataofthecurrentcellwillbeverifiedandupdatedwhenyoumovetothe
nextcell.
Cut/Copy/Pastefunctionalitybetweencellsintheworksheetisavailableusingthefollowing
keyboardshortcuts:
Ctrl+XCut
Ctrl+CCopy
Ctrl+VPaste
Onscreen Keyboard Entry

Ifakeyboardisnotattached,youmayselectacellusingthetouchscreen:
1. Singletapselectsthecell.
2. Doubletapdisplaystheonscreenkeyboardtoallowyoutoenterthedata.
Note: CellCut/Copy/Pastefunctionalityisnotavailablewithoutanexternalkeyboard
attached.
18.4.3
Xover/Aux: Design (Loudspeaker Modules Only)

TheXover/AuxscreensprovideaccesstoHPFandLPFfrequenciesandtypes(including
crossovers)alongwithoutputEQfiltersandtypes.Theabbreviatedcodesforthisdataare
listedherewithdescriptions.
HPF and LPF Types

ThesameHPF/LPF/Crossovertypesareallowedviadataentryasareallowedviathe
HPF/LPF/CrossoverscrollbarsontheXoverpage.ThefollowingHPF/LPFtypesare
availableforthelowestoutputHPFandhighestoutputLPF:
229
Table 18-2 HPF and LPF Types
Bessel
Butterworth
Linkwitz-Riley
BE6
BU6
BE12
BU12
LR12
BE18
BU18
BE24
BU24
LR24
Classic Crossover Types

ThefollowingHPF/LPFtypesareallowedforcrossoverpointsonly(allHPF/LPFfields
exceptfortheHPFonthelowestoutputchannel,andtheLPFonthehighestoutputchannel
forthemodule).
Table 18-3 Classic Crossover Types
Bessel
Butterworth
Linkwitz-Riley
BE6
BU6
BE12
BU12
LR12
BE18
BU18
BE24
BU24
LR24
BE30
BU30
BE36
BU36
LR36
BE42
BU42
BE48
BU48
LR48
Linear Phase Crossover Types

ThefollowingHPF/LPFtypesareallowedforLinearPhase2Wayand3Waymodule
crossoverpointsonly(allHPF/LPFfieldsexceptfortheHPFonthelowestoutputchannel,
andtheLPFonthehighestoutputchannelforthemodule).
Table 18-4 Linear Phase Crossover Types
Linear Phase
24 dB
Linear Phase 48 dB
Linear Phase Brick

Wall
LP24
LP48
LPBW
Note: Linearphasecrossoversrequirebothsidesofthecrossoverpointtobethesame
crossovertype.Thereforeiftheonesideofthecrossoverischanged,theotherside
willchangeautomatically.
230
Designer Worksheets
Linear Phase Alignment Delay

Unlikemostvaluesintheworksheet,AlignmentDelayisamodulebasedvalue,nota
channelbasedvalue.Therefore,whentheAlignmentDelayvalueischangedforanychannel,
allotherchannelsofthatmodulewillbeupdatedautomatically.
Table185liststheallowablealignmentdelaysforeachmoduletype.
Table 18-5 Alignment Delay
Module Type
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Option 5
Option 6
LP2Wayand
LP3Way
1.25ms
2.5ms
5ms
10ms
20ms
40ms
LP4Way
3.15ms
6.29ms
12.58ms
25.17ms
NA
NA
Output EQ Types
Table186showstheavailableoutputEQtypeabbreviations,descriptions,anddefault
values.
Table 18-6 Output EQ Types
EQ Type
Abbrev.
EQ Type
Description
Default Gain
(or Order for All
Pass Filter)
Default Freq
Default
Bandwidth
LS
LowShelf
0dB
125Hz
1.9
BP
Bandpass
(Parametric)
0dB
500Hz
0.33
AP
AllPass
Secondorder
800Hz
0.33
HS
HighShelf
0dB
8,000Hz
1.9
18.4.4
HPF/LPF - Design (Mesa EQ Only)

Crossovers,EQ,andAllPassfiltersarenotavailableontheMesaEQ
HPF/LPFDesignscreen.ThesameHPF/LPFtypesareavailableforMesaEQ.
18.4.5
Levels - Design
ThedataontheLevelsDesignworksheetisenteredbytypingtheappropriatenumerical
valueintoacellontheworksheet.Anerrormessagewillbedisplayedifthevalueisinvalid
orincorrect.
TosetpolaritythroughtheLevelsDesignworksheet,entereither+(positive)
or(negative)inthepolarityfield.Thepolarityofeachoutputcanbeindependentlylocked
usingtheLockPolarity?field,whichisonlyavailableviathisworksheet.
231
Tolockpolarityofanoutput,changethevalueintheassociatedLockPolarity?fieldtoY.
Theexamplefourwaymoduleshowninthefollowingfigurehasthepolarityofallchannels
lockedexceptfortheinputandlowestoutput.
Whenthemoduleislocked,theworksheetwillappearasshowninthenextfigure,andin
thisexample,outputpolarityforchannels2,3,and4willbelockedeveninDesignerMode.
InUserMode,theworksheetsarenotavailableandonlytheinputpolaritycanbechanged
viatheLevelsscreens.
232
Designer Worksheets
18.4.6
PEQ - Design
ThePEQDesignworksheetdisplaysthedetailsforeachPEQoverlayfortheselectedDolby
LakeProcessor.
Table187showstheavailableoutputEQtypeabbreviations,descriptions,anddefault
values.
Table 18-7 EQ Types
EQ Type
Abbrev.
EQ Type
Description
Default Gain
(or Order for All
Pass Filter)
Default Frequency
Default
Bandwidth
LS
LowShelf
0dB
125Hz
1.9
0dB
500Hz
0.33
0dB
830Hz(low)
0.33
0dB
1,200Hz(high)
0.33
0dB
8,000Hz
1.9
BP
ME
HS
Bandpass
(Parametric)
MesaFilter
HighShelf
Note: TheextrafieldsfortheMesafilterareonlyeditablewhenaMesafiltertypeis
entered.
18.4.7
GEQ - Design
TheGEQDesignworksheetdisplaysthedetailsforeachGEQoverlayfortheselected
DolbyLakeProcessor,includingthegainvalueofeachGEQfilterandthebypassed/inserted
statusofeachfilterandeachoverlay.
18.4.8
Locked Modules/Hidden/View Only Data

Ifdataonamodulehasbeenhiddenorsettoviewonly,andthemodulehasbeenlocked,
thentheassociateddatawilleitherbedisplayedbutnoteditableontheworksheets(forView
Onlydata)orwillbereplacedwiththewordLocked(forHiddendata).
233
Chapter 19
Firmware Upgrade Process
ThischapterdescribestheprocessupgradingfirmwareontheDolbyLakeProcessor.
19.1
Firmware Upgrade Using the Update Utility

ThefirmwareupgradeutilitiesallowfastupgradeforlargenetworksofDolbyLake
ProcessorsandLakeContourTMPro26and MesaQuadEQTMprocessors.
TousetheupdateutilitytoperformaDolbyLakeProcessorfirmwareupgrade,performthe
followingsteps:
1.
InstallthelatestversionoftheControllersoftware.
2.
PoweronallProcessors,andconfigureusingawirednetwork.
3.
SelecttheDolbyLakeProcessorfirmwareupdateutilityfromtheStartPrograms
location.Bydefault,theseutilitiesarelocatedinafolderlabeled
DolbyLakeControllerv5.0FirmwareUpdateUtilities.
Note: ToperformafirmwareupgradeonaContourPro26orMesaQuadEQunit,tapthe
appropriateupdateutilityfromtheFirmwareUpdateUtilitiesfolder.
Pleaseselectanduseawirednetworkforperformingfirmwareupgrades.Alossof
networkconnectivitycouldresultinafailedfirmwareupgrade.
235
TheProcessorsonthenetworkwillappearinalistwiththeircurrentfirmwareversions
displayed.Thefirmwareversiontobeloadedisshownatthetopofthescreen(target
firmware);thiswilldefaulttothelatestversionavailable.
4.
TapSelectoldandthenUpdate.Awarningmessageappears.
5.
236
TapOKinresponsetothewarningmessage.
Firmware Upgrade Using the Dolby Lake Controller
TheProcessorswillbeupdatedwiththelatestfirmware.Thepercentagevalueindicatesthe
statusoftheupdateofthatunit.
Agreencheckmarkindicatesasuccessfulupdate,orthatthecurrentfirmwarealready
matchesthatselectedatthetopofthescreen:
Aredcrossindicatesthefirmwarehasnotyetbeenupgradedtotheselectedtargetfirmware
version:
WhenyouareusingtheContourPro26orMesaQuadEQupdateutilities,aseparatecolumn
isdisplayedfortheARMandDSPupdates.
6.
WaitforallProcessorstobeupgraded.Amessageappears,indicatingthatyoumust
restarttheupdatedframes.
19.2
7.
CyclethepowerofeachProcessorbyturningthepowerswitchoff,thenbackon.
ThiscompletestheupgradeprocessandresetstheProcessortothedefaultfactory
configuration.
8.
TapOK,thentapExittoquitthefirmwareupdateutility.
Firmware Upgrade Using the Dolby Lake Controller

WerecommendusingtheDolbyLakeControllersoftwareonlyforupgradingsmallnumbers
ofDolbyLakeProcessors.TheFirmwareUpdateUtilityprovidesafasterupgradeprocessfor
largenetworks.
237
ToupgradefirmwareusingtheDolbyLakeControllersoftware,performthefollowingsteps:
1.
InstallthelatestversionoftheDolbyLakeController.
2.
OpentheController.
3.
TapModules,anddraganoldframefromtheModulesscrollbarintotheworkarea.All
modulesoftheframewillflashindicatingithasoldfirmwareandawarningmessage
willappear.
4.
Readthewarningmessage,andtapOK.
5.
Placealloldfirmwareframesintheworkarea,thentapHome.
6.
TaptheflashingUpdateFirmwarebutton.
7.
Readtheonscreenwarningmessage,tappingYestoproceed.
WhenallProcessorshavebeenupdated,cyclethepowerofeachunitbyturningthepower
switchoffandthenbackon.ThiscompletestheupgradeprocessandresetstheProcessortoa
defaultfactoryconfiguration.
238
8.
WaitforeachProcessortoresyncfollowingthepowercycle.
9.
TapOKtothewarningmessagethatadvisesthatthebackupfilewillberecalled.This
filewillreloadtheProcessorswiththedatathatwaspresentpriortotheupgrade
process.
Appendix A
IP Address Selection
Inmostapplications,theIPaddressesandotherconfigurationparametersoftheunderlying
Ethernetsystemwillnotneedtobeadjustedbytheenduser.Ifasystemrequiresadvanced
networkingrequirements,however,suchasthepartitioningofahighbandwidthEthernet
backboneintovirtuallocalareanetworks(VLANs),thenaqualifiednetworkengineermay
needtomakeadjustmentstothedefaultEthernetconfigurationoftheDolbyLake
ProcessorandthecomputerrunningtheDolbyLakeControllersoftware.Thisappendix
providesreferenceinformationpertainingtoEthernetconfiguration.
A.1
Network Essentials
Ethernethasbecomeacosteffectiveandeasytoconfiguresystemfornetworkingpersonal
computers,servers,localareanetworks(LANs),andindustrialandprofessionalequipment,
andevenprovidesthefundamentaltransportbackboneoftheInternet.SinceEthernetisso
widelyusedforsomanyapplications,thereareanumberofrulesgoverningthenetworkto
ensurethattherearenoconflictsbetweenmultipledevicesattemptingtocompetefor
bandwidthontheEthernetnetwork.
IPaddressesprovidetheuniqueidentifierofeachnodeonanEthernetnetwork.The
addressuniquelyidentifiesthenetworkthatthenodeison,aswellasuniquelyidentifying
thenodeonthatnetwork.Inother,morepracticalterms,theuniqueidentifierensuresthat,
forexample,personalcomputersallaroundtheworlddonotclogtheInternetwithmessages
intendedforlocalareadatatransfersandthelike.
SinceEthernetisusedbothlocallyandglobally,theEthernetstandardshavereserved
differentrangesofIPaddressesforvariousapplications.PublicIPaddressesareusedonthe
Internet,andshouldnotbeusedinLANs.ArangeofprivateIPaddresseshavealsobeen
definedandsetasideforuseoninternalnetworks.TheseprivateIPaddressescanbeusedon
internalnetworksbyanyone,astheInternetsbackbonerouterswillnotroutepacketswith
theseaddresses.
TheDolbyLakeProcessorhardwareandDolbyLakeControllersoftwarehavebeen
developedandtestedforuseoninternalnetworksthatarenotintendedtobeconnectedto
theInternet.Therefore,werecommendthatyouuseprivateIPaddresseswhenconfiguring
thenetwork.
239
IP Address Selection
A.2
Factory Reset Configuration

AfterstartingaDolbyLakeProcessorfactoryreset,theIPaddresswillbesetinthe
AutomaticPrivateIPAddressrange169.254.x.xwithasubnetmaskof255.255.0.0.
DantedigitalaudionetworkingmakesuseofAppleBonjourzeroconfiguration
networkingtoautomaticallyidentifyallDantedevicesonthenetwork.Itisimperativethat
BonjourisinstalledontheDolbyLakeControllerPC.
ThedefaultstartingpointisforallprocessorstobeleftwiththisfactoryresetautomaticIP
addressrange,withthecontrollerPCconfiguredtoObtainanIPaddressautomatically.If
problemsareencountered,oryourequireamorecomplexconfiguration,pleaserefertoa
networkspecialist,andinthecaseofaDanteaudionetwork,referalsotoDantespecific
configurationdocumentationandtheDolbyLiveSoundforumat
http://livesoundforum.dolby.com/.
Ifdesired,youcanalsouseClassA,ClassBorClassCprivateIPaddressranges.These
addressesrequireadditionalconfiguration,andthusmoreknowledgeofIPaddressesand
networking.Forreference,TableA1showsafewprivateIPaddressrangesthatare
recommendedforusewiththeDolbyLakeProcessorandDolbyLakeControllernetwork.
WerecommendthatyouconfigurethenetworkwithaprivateIPaddresswithintheranges
showninTableA1.
Table A-1 Recommended Private IP Addresses
Class
Range
10.x.x.x
169.254.x.x(AutomaticPrivateIPAddress);Default
172.16.x.xthrough172.31.x.x
192.168.0.xthrough192.168.255.x
Youcan,however,configureDolbyLakeProcessorsandDolbyLakeControllersto
communicateoveranetworkusinganyIPaddressandsubnetmaskcombinationrequired
foryourparticularapplication.Moresophisticatednetworksthatincludetrafficfromother
professionalandconsumerequipmentmustbeconfiguredcorrectlytoachievedesired
operation.
240
Appendix B
Command-Line Options
TheDolbyLakeControllerprovidesanumberofcommandlineoptionstoenableor
disablecertainfunctionality.TheseoptionsmaybeenteredwhenlaunchingtheController
fromacommandprompt,ormaybesetusingashortcutstargetoption.
Asanexample,thefollowingstepsdescribehowtoconfigureashortcutonthedesktopto
launchtheDolbyLakeControllerindaylightmode:
1.
RightclickontheMicrosoftWindowsdesktopandselectNewShortcut.
2.
Whenaskedtotypethelocationoftheitem,ensuringthatyouenclosethelocationofthe
DolbyLakeControllerexecutableinquotationmarks,typethefollowing(orthelocation
ofyourinstallation):
"C:\Program Files\Dolby\Dolby Lake Controller v5.1\Dolby Lake Controller.exe" daylight
3.
TapNext.
4.
Whenaskedtogiveanamefortheshortcuttype,enter:DLCOutdoor.
5.
TapFinish.
6.
Doubleclickthenewlycreatedshortcut.
Command Line Options Reference

Thefollowingtabledescribestheoptionsforcommandlinefunctionality.
Option
Description
aesswap
Enablesthe[AES1/23/4]swapbuttonontheLakeMesaQuad
TM
EQ I/Oconfigurationpage.
daylight
ForcesdaylightmodefromthestartoftheController.
fullscreen
Forcesthescreenresolutionduringthecontrollersessionto1024
76816bitcolor,insteadofthecurrentWindowssettings.These
changesapplyonlytotheDolbyLakeController,andarerestored
whenminimizingorquittingthecontroller.
nodblclick
Disablestheuseofdoubleclickingonthemenubartorename
groupsorselectfiles.
nonetfix
Stopstheautomaticdisablingofunusedmultiplenetwork
adaptersincaseofcommunicationerrors.Onlyuseifyouhave
multiplenetworkcardsthatyouwishtoremainactive,and
bewarethatthisoptionmaycausecommunicationproblems,
dependingonyoursetup.
241
Command-Line Options
Option
Description
nonfullscreen
Thismodestopstheautomaticchangeofanyvideocardsettings
duringthecontrollersession;thereforecorrectmanualsettings
mustbemade.Thewholescreenisstillused.Thisisnota
windowedmodeoption.
offline
ForcestheControllerintoofflinemodeduringstartupsono
networkadapterisselected.
Systemmem
Forcetheuseofsystemmemoryinsteadofvideomemoryto
createtheworksheetsin.Somevideoadapterscannotholdthe
worksheetsinmemoryastheymaybetoowidesothisfixwill
helpthem.
242
Index
Index
1AuxiliaryOutputmodule
159
3AuxiliaryOutputsmodule
156
4AuxiliaryOutputsmodule
157,158
abbreviations
moduletype
153
about
177
accessDesignerMode
212
accessingEQ/Levels
65
addEQ
214
addgrouptoconfiguration
165,166
addnewEQoverlay
53
addpage
147,169,182
100
addingoutputspecificEQ
additionalDesignerModeFunctions
225
adjustcrossovers
56
adjustfactory
222
adjustgroupEQorlevels
68
adjustinputheadroom
73
adjustinglevels
45
alignmentdelay
93,231
allmute
172
AllPassfilter
222
AmpClipreferencelevel
74
AMXandCrestroncontrol
201
assignmeters
75
166
assignmodulestoagroup
attacktime
72
audiblechangeswhensynchronizing
194
automatictimeconstants
72
AuxOutputFunctionsmenu
100
auxiliarychannel
127
auxiliaryoutputchannels
98
AuxiliaryOutputmenu
102
auxiliaryoutputs
99,154
availablefunctionalityviaMIDI
202
baseconfiguration
144,210,214,225
security
212
60
baseconfigurationfile
save
215
button
Cobranet
133
buttonbar
24
ButtonBarshortcuts
196
bypassfilter
85
calculationoftimeconstants
72
changecrossovertype
57,96
changegroupinputdelay
207
changepassword
176
changingtoContour&MesaMode
28
channeldelay
71
channelgain
71
73
channellabels
CL3way
SeeClassic3Way
Classic2Way
127
Classic3Way
31,69
Classic3Way/3auxiliaryoutputs
156,157
Classic4Way/4Aux(withClassic2Way/2Aux) 157,
158
Classic5Way/5Aux
159
Classic6Waymodule
160
Classic6Way/6auxiliaryoutputs
160
95
Classiccrossover
Classiccrossovers
154
Clearbutton
146
clearingapresetlocation
112
clock
autodetection
115
Cobranet
116,118
configuration
114
CobraNet
bundle
134
button
133
clock
116,118
conductor
134
latency
134
performer
134
priority
134
combinecrossover
93
commandlineoptions
241
communication
verifying
12
189
communicationandsynchronization
communicationerrors
190
compareoverlays
84
comparesystemconfigurationfiles
106
comparesystempresets
111
computerrequirementsandconfiguration
3
computersettings
forProcessors
192
conductor
134
configuration
clock
114
computer
3
I/O
114
configurationfile
recall
106
Index
configurationinformation
30
configuringtheTabletPCforwirelessnetworking 15
confirmingwirelessoperation
17
contextswitching
196
Contexts
175
Contour&Mesamode
27
Contourconfigurationfile
60
Contourmodules
28
Controllers
multiple
184
primaryandsecondary
185
copygroup
168
copyicon
181
copymodule
140
83,84
copyoverlay
createoverlay
83
crossover
changetype
96
disable
97
set
97
crossovercombine
93
crossoverfunctions
91
crossoverinterface
56
crossoveropy
92
crossoverpage
92
crossoverpaste
92
crossoverscreens
hide
221
crossoverselect
95
crossoversplit
93
crossovers
56,87,213
linearphase
91,160
Crossovers
153
cuticon
181
Dante
41
inputs
118
daylightmode
178
defaultoverlays
76
defaultsettings
68
delay
93,231
channel
71
delaytime
207
delayunits
176
Deletebutton
109,145
deletefilter
85,97
deletemodule
142
deleteoverlay
83
Designerfunctions
176
DesignerMode
176,209,210
212
access
additionalfunctions
225
passwordprotection
211
DesignerModeprocess
221
DesignerModesecurity
212
DesignerModetutorial
212
designerworksheets
227
244
designingandprotectingaDolbyLakeController
system
211
digitaloutputconfiguration
128
disablecrossover
97
disableleveladjustments
224
disablingkeyboardshortcuts
195
DolbyLakeControllertutorial
23
editfilter
86,97,98
EnableMutebutton
73
EnablePolaritybutton
73
enablingkeyboardshortcuts
195
EQfunctions
222
EQoverlay
addnew
53
EQoverlays
51,76
default
68
EQpreferences
92
EQtypes
231
EQ/Levels
166,171
accessing
65
EQ/Levelsbutton
68,113
EQ/Levelsmenu
67
47
equalization
errors
190
externalcontrolinterfaces
201
factory
222
factoryreset
138
factoryresetconfiguration
240
file
baseconfiguration
144
delete
109,145
manage
145
openorrecall
143
ReadOnly
108,145
rename
108,145
storeover
107
filetypes
60,153
fileutilities
108
FileUtilitiesbutton
145
filter
activateordeactivate
97
bypassorinsert
85
Mesa
54
filterbypass
97
FilterDeletebutton
85,97
FilterEditbutton
86,97
FilterFlatbutton
85,97
filterinsert
97
filters
adjust
101
highpassandlowpass
100
firmwareupgrade
237
flattenfilter
85
folder
createnew
109
open
108,145
Index
openorrecall
143
folders
manage
108
frame
26
label
33,212
FrameConfigmenu
138
frameconfigurations
146
framelabel
139
framepresetrecall
203
framepresets
146,148,149,151,152
frames
link
169
gain
channel
71
Gangbutton
169
generalkeyboardshortcuts
195
GEQ
SeegraphicEQ
GEQ:Designworksheet
233
GEQoverlayshortcuts
197
globalaccess
177
GlobalAccesssettings
220
globallevel
209
globalsettings
220
graphicEQ
47,68
GraphicEQscreen
79
graphicoverlay
47,76
graphics
formodulefiles
226
group
addtoconfiguration
165,166
assignmodulesto
166
copy
168
label
167
paste
168
remove
168
groupadjustments
68
groupEQoverlay
insertorbypass
204
groupinput
muteorunmute
205
grouplevels
68
groups
58,218
Groupsmenu
165
headroom
adjust
73
helpandstatusmessages
25
hexconversionforSysExmessages
202
hiddenmodules
233
71
hiddenoutputchannels
hiddenoverlays
77
hidecrossoverpage
92
hideoverlay
217
hidepage
182
highpassfilter
88
highpassfilters
100
highprecisionfilteradjustments
86
Homebuttonbar
63
Homemenu
63
HPF
Seehighpassfilter
HPFcenterfrequency
89
HPFscreen
87
HPFSelectbutton
96
231
HPF/LPF:Designworksheet
I/OConfigbutton
35
I/OConfigpage
114
icon
copy
181
paste
181
IconControlmenu
173
iconsize
174
IdealGraphicEQ
49,76
inputconfiguration
118
InputEQmenu
81
inputheadroom
73
inputHPF
88
inputmix
124
inputmutes
136
inputselection
137
119,120
inputtypeselection
insertfilter
85
insertorbypassgroupEQoverlay
204
insertorbypassmoduleEQoverlay
204
installation
3,8
interactivesignalpathblockdiagram
137
interfaces
externalcontrol
201
IPaddress
136
IPaddressconfiguration
9
IPaddressselection
239
IsoFloatstatus
122
keyboardshortcuts
177,195
Label&Lockbutton
139
labelframe
212
labelgroup
167
labeloverlay
83
labelingframesandmodules
33
LatencyMatch
133
levellimits
70,213,223
levels
44,69,213,224
adjusting
45
Levels:Designworksheet
231
Levelsfunctions
58,222
Levelsscreenshortcuts
200
Levelsscreens
225
197
cyclethrough
limitercorner
72
LimiterMaxbutton
71
limiters
71
LinearPhase2way
94,95,161
LinearPhase3way
94,95,162
LinearPhase4way
91,92,95,163
LinearPhaseClassic2Way
127
245
Index
linearphasecrossovers
91,160
linkframesormodules
169
loadnewbaseconfiguration
215
lobestudies
171
lockbaseconfiguration
214
lockmodule
218
lockpolarity
73,232
lockedmodules
233
lowoutputHPF
88
lowpassfilter
92
set
96
lowpassfilters
100
LP2way
SeeLinearPhase2way
LP3way
SeeLinearPhase3way
LP4way
SeeLinearPhase4way
LPF
Seelowpassfilter
LPFscreen
87
LPFSelectbutton
96
MACaddress
135
mainnavigationbuttons
196
Mainpage
63
MainPagecomponents
24
managefiles
145
manualconfiguration
116
maximumpeaksignallevel
72
71
maximumRMSsignallevel
MaxPeakLevelbutton
72
MaxRMScorner
71
MaxRMSlevelbutton
71
menu
AuxiliaryOutputs
102
EQ/Levels
67
FrameConfig
138
Groups
165
Home
63
IconControl
173
InputEQ
81
Modules
113
Network
183
Pages
180
Solo/Mute
171
SystemStoreandRecall
105
UserPreferences
175
MEq
SeeMesaEQmodule
Mesaconfigurationfile
60
MesaEQmodule
164
Mesafilter
54
MesaParametricEQ
76
messages
25
SysEx
202
MeterOptionsbutton
74
meters
44,75,173
MIDI
202
MIDI(00)
203
MIDI(01)
204
MIDI(02)
204
246
MIDI(03)
205
MIDI(04)
206
MIDI(05)
207
201
MIDIcontrol
MIDIfunctionality
202
minimizingtheLakeController
26
mode
daylight
178
module
26
assigngraphics
226
delete
142
label
34,139
lock
218
muteorunmute
206
passwordprotect
225
pastedatato
140
recall
143
store
144
storeconfiguration
144
storeorrecall
143
unlock
226
139
moduleandbaseconfigurationlocking
moduleEQoverlay
insertorbypass
204
modulefile
save
218
modulefiletypes
153
moduleicons
30
modulelabel
139
modulelevels
68
moduletypeabbreviations
153
modules
grouping
58
link
169
muteall
172
Modulesmenu
113
multipleControllers
184
mute
enable
73
172
muteallmodules
mutegroupinput
205
muteindicators
31
mutemodule
206
network
183
networkerrors
190
networkessentials
239
Networkmenu
183
networksetup
8
NewFolderbutton
109,146
NewStorebutton
108,144
offline
186
offlinemodules
189
onlineprocessor
187,188
Openbutton
106,107,108,143,145
options
commandline
241
Index
outofsync
191
outputchannel
hidden
71
outputchannels
auxiliary
98
outputconfiguration
128
digital
128
overlay
label
83
ViewOnly
217
overlaybutton
83
OverlayDeletebutton
83
OverlayFlatbutton
85
OverlayLabelbutton
83
OverlayNewbutton
83
OverlayPasteOverbutton
83
overlays
84
84
compare
default
76
hidden
77
overwriteconfigurationfile
106
page
add
147,169
pageadd
182
pagedelete
182
pagehide
182
pagelabel
181
pagetabs
26
Pagesmenu
180
parametricEQ
52,68,90
parametricEQfilters
89
ParametricEQscreen
77
parametricoverlay
47,76
password
211
change
176
passwordretrieval
211
passwordprotectDesignerMode
211
pastegroup
168
pasteicon
181
pastemodule
140
pasteoverlay
83
PCnetworkingsetup
8
PCspecifications
3
PEQ
SeeparametricEQ
PEQ:Designworksheet
233
PEQoverlayshortcuts
198
performer
134
pile
172
polarity
enable
73
lock
232
74
prelimiter
presetmismatch
112
primaryandsecondaryControllers
185
processorsettings
forController
193
quicksystempresetrecallandcomparison
111
ReadOnlybutton
108,145
RecallasNewSystem
61,106
RecallasSubSystem
61
RecallasVirtual
61,107
Recallbutton
143
RecallComparebutton
106
203
recallframepreset
recallmodule
143
recallingasystempresetintomultipleprocessors 111
recommendedvideocardsettings
4
redo
196
releasetime
72
Removebutton
142
removegroup
168
removeunusedchannelmeterandfader
218
Renamebutton
108,145
Replacebutton
141
replaceframeormodule
140
187,188
replacingvirtualmodules
requirements
computer
3
restrictleveladjustments
223
restrictedaccess
68
restrictedfunctionality
185
resyncprocess
190
savebaseconfigurationfile
215
savemodulefile
218
savemodulesettings
61
savesystemconfigurationfile
61
screens
cyclethrough
197
scrollingpages
182
securebaseconfigurationfile
215
security
baseconfiguration
212
securityforGlobalAccessfunctions
220
securityforgroupfunctions
218
securityformodulefunctions
217
securitylevels
209
setcrossover
97
setfilter
96
settings
inputpanel
6
power
5
videocard
3
setupwirelessnetwork
13
shortcutcombinationkeys
196
shortcuttouserdatafolder
105
shortcuts
GEQoverlay
197
keyboard
177,195
Levelsscreens
200
PEQoverlay
198
Xover/Auxscreens
199
Showmode
179
247
Index
signalpathdiagram
137
singlemodulefile
60
SmaartLive
86
SmaartLiveController
multipleControllers
186
softwareinstallation
8
softwareversion
177
solo
172
solo/muteenable
171
Solo/Mutemenu
171
splitcrossover
93
SSID
14
startingtheDolbyLakeController
23
StereoClassic2Way(+AuxiliaryChannels)
155
107,144,146
Storebutton
storemodule
144
storeorrecallmodule
143
StoreSubSystem
61
StorewithNewNamebutton
146
storingasystempresetinmultipleprocessors
110
storingoveranexistingpreset
112
subnetmask
136
SuperModule
definition
147
labelling
34
switchmodes
225
switchingcontext
196
189,190
synchronization
synchronizing
audiblechanges
194
synchronizingControllerandProcessors
193
SysExmessages
201,202
systemconfiguration
105
save
61
storeinmultipleprocessors
110
systemconfigurationfile
60
compare
106
systempresets
109
SystemStoreandRecallmenu
105
TabletPCandLaptoppowersettings
5
6
TabletPCInputpanelsettings
tabs
26
technicaldata
135
timeconstants
72
togglemeters
173
turnoffpowersavingfeatures
5
tutorial
23
DesignerMode
212
GlobalAccess
220
undo
196
unlockmodule
226
unlockpolarity
73
unmutegroupinput
205
unmutemodule
206
unmutemoduleinput
206
unusedoutputchannels
225
updatingController
193
updatingProcessors
192
upgradefirmware
235,237
Usermode
225
UserPreferencesmenu
175
usingauxiliaryoutputs
99
usingPEQfilters
89
usingthehighpassfilter
88
verifyingControllerandProcessorcommunication 12
videocardsettings
3
recommended
4
ViewOnly
68
viewonlymodules
233
187
virtualframes
wirednetworksetup
12
wirelessnetworksetup
13
wirelessnetworkingpackage
14
workingoffline
186
worksheetnavigationanddataentry
229
worksheets
227
Xoverscreen
87,89
Xover/Aux:Designworksheet
229
Xover/Auxscreenshortcuts
199
Xover/Aux/HPF/LPFfunctions
221
248

Dolby Lake Controller Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Dolby Lake Controller Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Dolby Lake

Part Number 911002

Dolby Laboratories, Inc.